JP6276507B2 - Management device - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a management apparatus. Specifically, it is provided corresponding to a gaming machine capable of playing a game using a predetermined gaming medium, executes a lending process for lending the gaming medium based on the valuable value, and is paid out from the gaming machine. count process for counting the game medium is executed the payout for paid out game media based on at least one game media number counted by the game medium count and the count processing corresponding to the record medium The present invention relates to a management device that can communicate with a gaming device that executes processing, and manages the number of gaming media in association with the recording media.

  Conventionally, it is a lending machine that lends game media provided corresponding to a game machine capable of playing a game using a predetermined game medium such as a medal or a pachinko ball, and the counting means for counting the game media includes: There are some which are provided above the means for paying out the game media to be rented and the counted game media are stored as game media for rent (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-252946 A

  However, Patent Document 1 does not show specific control for counting and paying out game media. When the number of game media such as the player's own balls and storage balls is displayed on the lending machine, if the game media is counted or paid out, the number displayed and the actual number of balls and storage balls are displayed. Deviation occurs. If this happens, there will be a problem of distrusting the player.

  Further, if counting and payout are prohibited while displaying the number of game media, it is not possible to cope with a sudden need for game media. For this reason, the problem that it causes inconvenience to a player arises.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to avoid distrust and inconvenience to the player even when displaying the number of game media. It is to provide a gaming device (or recording medium processing device) and a management device capable of performing the above.

(1) Provided corresponding to a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 701) capable of playing a game using a predetermined gaming medium (for example, medal M, pachinko ball), and has a valuable value ( For example, a lending process (for example, a process for controlling a lending operation board 189, a payout device 182 and a ball payout device 797 of a pachinko gaming machine 701) for lending a game medium based on money, prepaid balance) is executed, Number of game media associated with a recording medium by executing a counting process for counting game media paid out from the gaming machine (for example, a process for controlling the built-in counting device 190 and each external counter) And a gaming device (for example, a meda) that executes a payout process for paying out game media based on at least one of the number of game media counted by the counting process. Management device (for example, card management computer 500, hall computer 540, medal management computer 550, or any two or three of them) that can communicate with the card lending machine 100, card unit 750, and recording medium processing device And a management means for managing the number of game media in association with the recording media (for example, step Sq5 to step Sq8, step Sq12 to step Sq17 in FIG. 44 executed in step Sg14 in FIG. 41). , Step Sq21 to Step Sq24, the settings changed in Step Sq21 to Step Sq24, specifically, the membership card table and visitor card table of FIG. Flag, theft card Grayed is stored. A)
The number of game media associated with the recording medium is displayed on the game device (for example, the display control board 129, the liquid crystal display 123, the display 7123, the information inquiry process of FIG. 46 executed in step Sg16 of FIG. 41). In response to receiving from the gaming device first information indicating that the illegal storage medium has reached a predetermined storage amount. , and a notifying means for performing a first notification regarding said gaming device of the transmission source of the first information and the first information, the notification means, a particular reservoir unauthorized game medium is less than the predetermined storage amount In response to receiving the second information indicating that the amount has been reached from the gaming device, the notification is different from the first notification, and the transmission source of the second information and the second information Play Performing a second notification and to a use device, the management device.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a management device capable of avoiding distrust and inconvenience to the player even when the number of game media is displayed. .

(2) Provided corresponding to a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 701) capable of playing a game using a predetermined gaming medium (for example, medal M, pachinko ball), and has a valuable value ( For example, a lending control for performing a lending process for lending gaming media based on money, prepaid balance (for example, a process for controlling a lending operation board 189, a paying device 182 and a ball paying device 797 of a pachinko gaming machine 701). Means (for example, control unit 181; step Sb21 in FIG. 30) and a counting process for counting game media paid out from the gaming machine (for example, controlling built-in counting device 190, each external counter counter) Count control means (for example, the control unit 181 and the count process of FIG. 36 executed in step Sb28 of FIG. 30). And the number of game media (for example, the number of possessed balls and the number of stored balls acquired from the management computer or card) associated with the recording medium being received and the number of game media (for example, counted) Payout for executing payout processing (for example, processing for controlling the replay operation board 185, the payout device 182, and the ball payout device 797 of the pachinko gaming machine 701) based on at least one of the number of possessed balls) And a gaming device (for example, medal lending machine 100, card unit 750, etc.) that is capable of communicating with the management device (for example, the control unit 181 and the replay process in FIG. 35 executed in step Sb24 in FIG. 30). Also called a recording medium processing device),
Display means (for example, display control board 129, liquid crystal display 123, display 7123, step Sg16 in FIG. 41) displays the number of game media associated with the recording medium being received based on information from the management device. Step St2) of the information inquiry process of FIG.
When the number of game media is displayed on the display means, the count control means and the payout control means respectively control to disable the counting process and the payout process (for example, the holding of FIG. 47). Turn on the ball information display flag indicating that the ball / storage ball information screen is displayed.If it is determined that the ball information display flag is on in step Sc26 of Fig. 36, the counts of step Sc4 and step Sc5 are counted. 35. If it is determined in step Sp10 in FIG. 35 that the ball information display flag is on, the replay main process in step Sp1 is not executed.) On the other hand, the lending control means is configured to perform the lending process. (For example, whether or not the ball information display flag is on or off) Management can be performed.).

  According to such a configuration, when the number of game media associated with the recording medium being received is displayed, the counting process and the payout process are controlled to be disabled while the lending process is disabled. It is controlled so that it does not become.

  For this reason, when the number of game media is displayed, it is possible to prevent the number of game media from fluctuating, and it is possible to receive a loan when game media are required. As a result, even when displaying the number of game media, it is possible to provide a gaming apparatus capable of avoiding distrust and inconvenience to the player.

(3) In the gaming device of (2) above,
As the lending process, there is a process (for example, a small-scale lending function) for lending a game medium by accepting a valuable value (for example, 100 yen) smaller than a normal lending unit amount (for example, 500 yen) ( For example, step Sg13) in FIG.
The lending control means controls the function not to be disabled when the number of game media is displayed on the display means (for example, whether the ball information display flag is on or off, The small amount lending process in step Sg13 in FIG. 41 can be executed.)

  According to such a configuration, when it is a situation where there is a number of game media associated with the recording medium, and when it is desired to urgently lend a game medium, the lending of the game medium is minimized. can do. As a result, the convenience for the player can be improved.

(4) In the gaming device of (2) or (3) above,
From a management device that manages the number of game media associated with the recording medium (for example, a card management computer 500, a hall computer 540, a medal management computer 550, or a computer that combines any two or three of these). Acquisition means for acquiring the number of game media (for example, the control unit 181 and step Sn7 of the card acceptance process of FIG. 31 executed in step Sb20 of FIG. 30) (In step St2 of the information collating process executed in step Sg16 in Fig. 41, the number of balls and the number of balls may be acquired for all types of game media and all unit prices.) Further comprising
The display means displays the number of game media based on the number of game media acquired by the acquisition means (for example, step St2 in FIG. 46; see the possessed / sold ball information screen in FIG. 47).

  According to such a configuration, the number of game media is acquired from the management device that manages the number of game media associated with the recording medium, and a payout process for paying out game media is executed based on the acquired number of game media. The number of game media is displayed based on the acquired number of game media.

(5) In the gaming device of (4) above,
The acquisition means includes at least a type of game medium (for example, medal, pachinko ball) and unit price (for example, 1 yen per ball, 2 yen per ball, 4 yen per ball, 5 yen per sheet, 20 yen per sheet, etc.). The number of game media for each one is acquired (for example, step Sn7 in FIG. 31),
The display means displays the number of game media for each of at least one of the type and unit price of the game media acquired by the acquisition device (for example, step St2 in FIG. 46; see the possessed / sold ball information screen in FIG. 47).

  According to such a configuration, the number of game media for at least one of the type and unit price of the game medium is acquired, and the number of game media for each of the acquired type and unit price of the game medium is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to show the player not only the type or unit price of the game medium corresponding to the game apparatus but also the number of game media of other types or unit prices. As a result, the convenience for the player can be improved.

(6) In the gaming device according to any one of (2) to (5) above,
The payout control means is a different recording medium associated with the same player as the recording medium being received by another gaming device (for example, any one of a card with a different member ID and the same member ID, a portable terminal, etc.) The payout process of paying out game media can be executed based on the number of game media associated with (for example, when other medal lending machines 100 accept cards with the same member ID). However, by holding the portable terminal having the same member ID as the card over the medal lending machine 100, it is possible to pay out the coins and stored balls corresponding to the portable terminal).
When the number of game media is displayed on the display unit of another game device, the payout control unit is configured to record different records associated with the same player as the recording medium being received by the other game device. The payout process based on the number of game media associated with the medium is also controlled so as to be disabled (for example, the other medal lending machine 100 accepts a card with the same member ID, When the number of stored balls is displayed, in the medal lending machine 100, the payout processing of the held balls / stored balls corresponding to the portable terminal having the same member ID as the card is disabled.

  According to such a configuration, a payout process of paying out game media based on the number of game media associated with different recording media associated with the same player as the recording media being received by another gaming device Can be executed, and when the number of game media is displayed on another gaming device, the recording media on a different recording medium associated with the same player as the recording media being accepted by the other gaming device are displayed. The payout process based on the number of associated game media is also controlled to be disabled.

  For this reason, during the display of the number of game media, not only the recording media being accepted but also other game devices will not be paid out on different recording media associated with the same player. Even when the recording media are associated with the same number of game media, the number of game media can be prevented from changing. As a result, even when a plurality of recording media can be used, it is possible to avoid distrusting the player.

(7) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of (2) to (6) above,
A counter for counting game media paid out from the gaming machine;
The game medium is non-spherical (for example, a medal)
The counter is provided in a lower part of a narrow part (for example, the narrow path K1 in FIG. 8 and the narrow path K2 in FIG. 16) of a lower part of the input part (for example, the opening 140a) into which the game medium is input (for example, FIG. 8)
A passage sensor (for example, a photo sensor 190h in FIGS. 8 and 19) for detecting the passage of the game medium in the narrow portion;
An operation unit (for example, a counting button 122 in FIG. 2 and a counting button SW122 ′ in FIG. 19) that receives an operation for starting counting by the counter;
The counting control means controls to execute an automatic counting process for counting game media in response to detection of game media by the passage sensor (for example, a medal detection sensor detects a medal at step Sc25 in FIG. 36). Then, in step Sc28, the drive of the rotating disk 190g is started, so that the medal is detected and counted by the photo sensor 190e.) On the other hand, the game medium is received in response to the operation received by the operation unit. (For example, if it is determined that the counting button 122 is operated in step Sc22 of FIG. 36, the driving of the rotating disk 190g is started in step Sc28, and the photosensor is thereby controlled. At 190e, medals are detected and counted).
The counting control means counts the game media thrown into the throwing unit when the counting by the counter is disabled (for example, a ball information display flag is on). In such a case, YES is determined in step Sc26 in FIG. 36, and even if it is determined in step Sc28 that the drive of the rotating disk 190g is not started and it is determined in step Sc21 that the rotating disk 190g is driven, If the ball information display flag is turned on, it is determined YES in step Sc35, and the drive of the rotating disk 190g is stopped in step Sc38. However, even if the ball information display flag is turned off, the medal that has accumulated is determined in step Sc25 in the narrow path meda. The medal is not detected by the detection sensor 190h, but if the count button 122 is operated, YES is determined in step Sc22, the drive of the rotating disk 90g is started in step Sc28, and the medal M is detected by the photo sensor 190e. .)

  According to such a configuration, the game medium is non-spherical, and the counter is provided at the lower part of the narrow part of the lower part of the input part into which the game medium is input. The gaming apparatus further includes a passage sensor that detects passage of the game medium in the narrow portion, and an operation unit that receives an operation for starting counting by the counter. A manual counting process for counting game media in response to an operation received by the operation unit while being controlled to execute an automatic counting process for counting game media in response to detection of the game media by the passage sensor When the counting by the counter is disabled, the game medium thrown into the throwing unit is counted by executing the manual counting process.

  Since the passage sensor is provided in the narrow portion, a minimum number of sensors may be provided. The number of game media is counted by passing the game media through the narrow portion, but if the count is disabled, the counting is not performed by the counter even if the game media passes through the narrow portion. It accumulates in the counting machine. Since the game medium thrown into the throwing unit when being inactivated is counted by executing the manual counting process according to the operation of the operation unit, the above-described disadvantages can be avoided.

(8) In the gaming device of (7) above,
The charging portion is provided with an open / close lid (for example, the lid member 160 in FIG. 4),
An opening / closing sensor for detecting opening / closing of the opening / closing lid (for example, an opening / closing sensor 190k in FIGS. 4, 9, and 19);
The counting control unit can execute the manual counting process even when the opening / closing sensor detects that the opening / closing lid is closed (for example, the lid member 160 is not open). If it is determined in step Sc22 in Fig. 36 that the counting button has been operated, the rotation disk 190g is started to be driven in step Sc28, and the medal is detected and counted by the photosensor 190e. Even if the member 160 is not in the open state, if it is determined in step Sc36 in FIG. 36 that the manual counting flag is on, the drive of the rotating disk is not stopped in step Sc38.

  According to such a configuration, the opening / closing lid is provided in the closing portion. The gaming device further includes an opening / closing sensor that detects opening / closing of the opening / closing lid. Even when it is detected by the open / close sensor that the open / close lid is closed, the manual counting process can be executed.

  For this reason, even if the open / close lid is closed, the manual counting process can be executed, so even if the open / close lid is closed with the game medium remaining in a state not counted by the counter remaining, Counting of game media can be made possible.

(9) a first addition control means that is provided corresponding to a gaming machine capable of playing a game based on game points, and that executes a first addition process for adding game points based on value; Based on at least one of a conversion control means for executing a conversion process for converting a point into a score, a score associated with the recording medium being received, and a score obtained by the conversion process A second addition control means for executing a second addition process for adding, and a gaming device capable of communicating with a management device,
Display means for displaying game points associated with the recording medium being received based on information from the management device;
When the game point is displayed on the display means, the conversion control means and the second addition control means control to disable the conversion process and the second addition process, respectively, The 1 addition control means controls the first addition process so as not to be disabled.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming apparatus capable of avoiding distrust and inconvenience to the player even when game points are displayed.

(1-1) Provided corresponding to a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 701) capable of playing a game using a predetermined gaming medium (for example, medal M, pachinko ball), (For example, banknotes), rent game media, and based on receiving a return operation (for example, operation of return buttons 114 and 752), it is used for renting game media out of the accepted money. Remaining amount specifying information (for example, card ID or member ID or prepaid remaining amount data) capable of specifying a remaining amount (for example, prepaid balance), and a counting device (for example, counting device 190, each counter 705) capable of counting game media ) Count identification information (for example, member ID, card) that can identify the number of counted game media (for example, the number of medals, the number of balls) Management for managing game devices (for example, medal lending machine 100, card unit 750) capable of discharging recording media (for example, membership cards, visitor cards) that can specify ID, number of medals, number of balls itself) An apparatus (for example, a card management computer 500, a hall computer 540, a medal management computer 550, or a computer combining any two or three of them),
Management for managing settings (for example, setting of function validity / invalidity, setting of password) for functions (for example, card lock function, theft card restriction function, small-scale lending function) for the recording medium received by the gaming device Means (for example, the settings changed in step Sq5 to step Sq8, step Sq12 to step Sq17, step Sq21 to step Sq24 in FIG. 44 executed in step Sg14 in FIG. 41 are managed. Specifically, the card management computer. In the member card table and the visitor card table of FIG. 22 of 500, a personal identification number, a card lock valid flag, and a theft card flag, which are settings of the respective functions, are stored.
The management means includes: a process of invalidating the first recording medium by receiving the second recording medium in a state where the first recording medium is received by the gaming device; A process of adding the remaining amount or the number of counted game media that can be specified on the recording medium to the remaining amount or the number of counted game media that can be specified on the second recording medium (for example, a diagram executed in step Sg12 of FIG. 41) When the game device executes the step Sj16) of 43 and the process for taking over the setting of the function for the first recording medium to the second recording medium, the setting of the function for the first recording medium is performed. Further management of the transfer to the second recording medium is performed (for example, the function setting for the first recording medium stored in the management device or the gaming device is set in the second recording medium). Step Sj20 in Figure 43, which is performed in step Sg12 of associating the media. Figure 41).

  According to such a configuration, when the second recording medium is received in the state where the first recording medium is received, the first recording medium is invalidated and the first recording medium is When the remaining amount or the number of counting game media that can be specified is added to the remaining amount or the number of counting game media that can be specified by the second recording medium, the setting of the function for the first recording medium is Taken over to the recording medium.

  For this reason, even when the first recording medium is integrated with the second recording medium, the function setting for the first recording medium is inherited by the second recording medium. As a result, even when a plurality of recording media are integrated, it is not necessary to set functions again, and a convenient management device can be provided.

(1-2) Provided corresponding to a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 701) capable of playing a game using a predetermined gaming medium (for example, medal M, pachinko ball), (For example, banknotes), rent game media, and based on receiving a return operation (for example, operation of return buttons 114 and 752), it is used for renting game media out of the accepted money. Remaining amount specifying information (for example, card ID or member ID or prepaid remaining amount data) capable of specifying a remaining amount (for example, prepaid balance), and a counting device (for example, counting device 190, each counter 705) capable of counting game media ) Count identification information (for example, member ID, card) that can identify the number of counted game media (for example, the number of medals, the number of balls) Management for managing game devices (for example, medal lending machine 100, card unit 750) capable of discharging recording media (for example, membership cards, visitor cards) that can specify ID, number of medals, number of balls itself) An apparatus (for example, a card management computer 500, a hall computer 540, a medal management computer 550, or a computer combining any two or three of them),
Management means for managing processing (for example, ball payout processing, history tabulation processing) in which functions (for example, ball payout function, history tabulation function) for the recording medium received by the gaming device are executed ( For example, a history totaling process for receiving a game signal such as a big hit signal from a gaming machine and totaling a game history such as the number of jackpots, and a medal, a holding ball, a saving medal, 24, which manages the number of jackpots collected by the history counting process of the history counting function in the member saving management table and visitor saving management table of FIG. Equipped with)
The management means includes: a process of invalidating the first recording medium by receiving the second recording medium in a state where the first recording medium is received by the gaming device; A process of adding the remaining amount or the number of counted game media that can be specified on the recording medium to the remaining amount or the number of counted game media that can be specified on the second recording medium (for example, a diagram executed in step Sg12 of FIG. 41) 43 when step Sj16) and the process for taking over the process for which the function for the first recording medium is executed for the second recording medium are executed by the gaming device. Further managing that the processing for executing the function for the medium has been taken over by the second recording medium (for example, for the first recording medium being executed in the gaming device) The process of Noh is continuously executed for the second recording medium, specifically, the history totaling process is continuously executed even for the handed over card. In this case, the ball payout process is continued even after the addition, and is subtracted from the total number of possessed medals and the number of possessed balls (step Sj20 in FIG. 43 executed in step Sg12 in FIG. 41).

  According to such a configuration, when the second recording medium is received in the state where the first recording medium is received, the first recording medium is invalidated and the first recording medium is When the remaining balance or the number of countable game media that can be specified is added up to the number of remaining balance or the countable game media that can be specified on the second recording medium, and the sum is added, the process for which the function for the first recording medium is being executed. , Succeeded to the second recording medium.

  For this reason, even when the first recording medium is integrated into the second recording medium, the process in which the function for the first recording medium is executed is taken over for the second recording medium. As a result, even when a plurality of recording media are integrated, there is no need to re-execute function processing, and a convenient management apparatus can be provided.

(1-3) The gaming system includes the management device according to (1-1) and the gaming device.
According to such a configuration, even when a plurality of recording media are integrated, it is not necessary to set a function again, and a convenient gaming system can be provided.

(1-4) A gaming system includes the above management device (1-2) and the gaming device.
According to such a configuration, even when a plurality of recording media are integrated, there is no need to re-execute function processing, and a convenient gaming system can be provided.

(1-5) In the management device of (1-1) or (1-2) or the gaming system of (1-3) or (1-4),
The management device is connected to a plurality of the gaming devices and receives and discharges recording media in each gaming device and manages the number of counted gaming media for each recording medium (for example, a medal management computer) 550).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to manage the number of counted game media with the management device that manages the gaming device.

(1-6) In the management device of (1-1) or (1-2) or the gaming system of (1-3) or (1-4),
The management device receives information related to the game from a plurality of the gaming machines (for example, a jackpot signal, a winning signal, a symbol determination signal, a number-of-balls signal), and is connected to the plurality of gaming devices. It is a business management device (for example, hall computer 540) that manages reception and discharge of recording media in each gaming device.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform business management such as information related to games in gaming machines by the management device that manages gaming devices.

(1-7) In the management device of (1-1) or (1-2) or the gaming system of (1-3) or (1-4),
The management device is connected to a plurality of the gaming devices, receives and discharges recording media in each gaming device and manages the number of counted gaming media for each recording medium, and a plurality of the gaming Information related to the game from the machine (for example, a jackpot signal, a winning signal, a symbol determination signal, an output number signal) is input, and connected to the plurality of gaming devices to accept a recording medium in each gaming device And a business management device for managing discharge (for example, a computer in which a hall computer 540 and a medal management computer 550 are combined).

  According to such a configuration, the management device that manages the gaming device can manage the number of counted game media and perform business management such as information related to the game in the gaming machine. This eliminates the need to install a plurality of management devices. As a result, the space for installing the management device can be saved.

(1-8) The management device of (1-1) or (1-2), the gaming system of (1-3) or (1-4), or (1-5) to (1-7) In any management device or gaming system of
The management device
Setting for invalidating the function setting for the recording medium at the end of the settlement of the remaining amount and the exchange of the number of game media to the number of game media, or at the end of the game hall where the management device is installed An invalidating means (for example, invalidating card settings such as valid / invalid setting of the card lock function at the end of the settlement in the settlement apparatus 580 and the exchange to the article in the gift exchange POS 570) is provided.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting that does not need to be carried over from the next day onward.

(1-9) In the management device of (1-1), the gaming system of (1-3), or the management device or gaming system of any one of (1-5) to (1-8),
The management device further includes:
Setting change accepting means (for example, the card ID of the theft card in the theft card restriction function is input by the management device) for accepting a change in the function setting for the recording medium.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to set functions for the recording medium in the management apparatus.

(1-10) In the management device of (1-1), the gaming system of (1-3), or the management device or gaming system of (1-5) to (1-9),
In a state where the first recording medium is received by the gaming device, at least a part of the remaining amount or the number of counted gaming media that can be specified by the first recording medium can be specified by the second recording medium. When the discharge is performed (for example, when the ball splitting process of FIG. 45 is executed in step Sg15 of FIG. 41), the function setting for the first recording medium is set to the second recording medium. (For example, the process such as step Sj20 in FIG. 43 executed in step Sg12 in FIG. 41 is not executed).

  According to such a configuration, in the state where the first recording medium is received, at least a part of the remaining amount or the number of counted game media that can be specified by the first recording medium is specified by the second recording medium. When the divided discharge control process for performing discharge control as possible is executed and the divided discharge control process is executed, the function setting for the first recording medium is not carried over to the second recording medium.

  For this reason, the divided second recording medium is often handed over to other players, but the function setting for the first recording medium is not carried over to the second recording medium (for example, Do not take over settings that you do not want to take over to a second recording medium (such as a password that would cause a security problem because it will be necessary to communicate with the delivery of the recording medium if you take over. As well as unnecessarily taking over unwanted settings (such as passwords that have not been determined by the user).

(1-11) In the management device of (1-2) or the gaming system of (1-4), or the management device or gaming system of (1-5) to (1-9) ,
In a state where the first recording medium is received by the gaming device, at least a part of the remaining amount or the number of counted gaming media that can be specified by the first recording medium can be specified by the second recording medium. When the process is executed (for example, when the ball splitting process of FIG. 45 is executed in step Sg15 of FIG. 41), the process in which the function for the first recording medium is executed is the first 2 is not taken over (for example, the process of step Sj20 of FIG. 43 executed in step Sg12 of FIG. 41 is not executed).

  According to such a configuration, in the state where the first recording medium is received, at least a part of the remaining amount or the number of counted game media that can be specified by the first recording medium is specified by the second recording medium. When the divided discharge control process for performing discharge control as possible is executed and the divided discharge control process is executed, the process in which the function for the first recording medium is executed is executed for the second recording medium. Cannot be taken over.

  For this reason, the divided second recording medium is often handed over to other players, but the second recording medium does not take over the process for executing the function for the first recording medium. Thus, it is possible not to take over a process being executed that is not desired to be taken over by the second recording medium, and it is possible to prevent an unnecessary takeover of the process being executed from being forced.

(1-12) In the management device of (1-1), the gaming system of (1-3), or the management device or gaming system of any one of (1-5) to (1-11) ,
In the setting of the function for the recording medium, the recording medium for the member (for example, a membership card) and the recording medium for a non-member (for example, a visitor card) are set in different formats (for example, the password for the card lock function is the membership card) Is a pre-registered personal identification number, and in the visitor card, the personal identification number input when the function is activated or the ID of the contacted mobile terminal).
When the second recording medium is the member recording medium, the function setting for the first recording medium is not carried over to the second recording medium (for example, executed in step Sg12 in FIG. 41). In step Sj20 of FIG. 43, if the card inserted later is a membership card, the setting of the password for the card lock function is not taken over).

  According to such a configuration, in the setting of the function for the recording medium, there are different types of settings for the recording medium for members and the recording medium for non-members, and the second recording medium is a recording medium for members. The function setting for the first recording medium is not carried over to the second recording medium.

  For this reason, it is a member recording medium, and it is possible to prevent an unnecessary setting from being taken over when a function is set in advance.

(1-13) (1-1) or (1-2) management device, (1-3) or (1-4) gaming system, (1-5) to (1-12) In any management device or gaming system,
In the gaming apparatus, control is performed so that notification of the setting of functions for the recording medium or processing being executed is executed by an external display device (for example, the call lamp 200) (for example, the number of jackpots in the history counting process) The game history is notified by the call lamp 200).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute notification of setting of functions for the recording medium or processing being executed on the external display device.

  Game devices and game machine display devices often report other information, and external display devices are often configured to convey information to the player in an easily understandable manner. For this reason, it is possible to easily notify the player of necessary information.

(1-14) The above management device (1-1) or (1-2), (1-3) or (1-4) gaming system, (1-5) to (1-13) In any management device or gaming system,
The function for the recording medium is a function for restricting discharge of the recording medium (for example, a card lock function),
The management means is summed on the condition that the restriction on discharge of the recording medium is released (for example, in FIG. 43 executed in step Sg12 of FIG. 41, the password of the card lock is obtained in step Sj21 and step Sj22). When the collation is determined to be OK, it is managed that the setting of the function for the recording medium has been taken over (when summed in step Sj16).

  According to such a configuration, the function for the recording medium is a function for restricting the discharge of the recording medium, and on the condition that the restriction on the discharge of the recording medium is released, the remaining amount of the first recording medium or the counting game The number of media is added to the second recording medium.

  Although the discharge of the recording medium is restricted, the second recording medium is accepted, the remaining amount of the first recording medium or the number of game media is added to the second recording medium, If the second recording medium is ejected, the remaining amount or the number of counted game media may be stolen while the player who owns the first recording medium is away. If the restriction on the discharge of the recording medium is not released, such a risk can be avoided because the remaining amount of the first recording medium or the number of counting game media is not added to the second recording medium.

(1-15) (1-1) or (1-2) management device, (1-3) or (1-4) gaming system, (1-5) to (1-14) In any management device or gaming system,
The gaming device further includes:
Return operation accepting means (for example, return buttons 114 and 752) for accepting the return operation;
A discharge control means for controlling discharge of the recording medium (for example, card R / W 187, control unit 181);
Confirmation operation accepting means (for example, touch panel 124, touch panel display 7123) for accepting a confirmation operation for confirming discharge of the accepted recording medium;
A first return process for controlling discharge of a recording medium on the condition that the confirmation operation is accepted by the confirmation operation accepting unit, and without the condition that the confirmation operation is accepted by the confirmation operation accepting unit Return setting means for setting which of the second return processing for controlling the discharge of the recording medium is executed (for example, “requires confirmation operation set by card management computer 500 or medal lending machine 100 or card unit 750? Control unit 181 for storing “no” or RAM of the card unit),
The discharge control means is set to be executed by the return setting means based on the receipt of the return operation by the return operation accepting means (for example, the receipt of the return request signal in step S202 of FIG. 53). The first return process or the second return process is executed (for example, it is determined whether or not “confirmation operation required” is set in step S204 in FIG. 53. If there is no setting, the card is immediately returned in step S209. If it is determined that there is a confirmation button operation in step S208, the card is returned in step S209).

  According to such a configuration, in order to prevent the theft of the game recording medium during the game, the game hall that performs the operation to prevent theft by the close monitoring of the store clerk, and the monitoring burden on the store clerk are reduced, but the player It is possible to make it possible to deal with both amusement halls of the amusement hall that desires the operation to prevent theft.

(1-16) In the management device or game system according to (1-15) above,
The confirmation operation accepting means is provided at a location that is a predetermined distance away from the return operation accepting means.

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult for another person who operates the return operation accepting unit to operate the confirmation operation accepting unit without being noticed by the player, and thus it is possible to more effectively prevent the game recording medium from being stolen. it can.

(1-17) In the management device or game system according to (1-15) or (1-16) above,
The return operation receiving means (for example, a return button 752) is provided in the gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 701),
The gaming device further includes:
Receiving means (for example, a ball rental communication unit of the card unit 750) for receiving a return request signal (for example, step S202 in FIG. 53) transmitted by the operation of the return operation receiving means,
The said discharge control means performs the said 1st return process or the said 2nd return process set by the said return setting means based on having received the said return request signal.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine only performs a normal process of transmitting a return request signal by operating the return operation accepting unit, it is not necessary to change the gaming machine.

(1-18) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-15) to (1-17) above,
The return operation receiving means (for example, a return button 752) is provided in the gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 701),
The gaming device further includes:
Receiving means (for example, a ball rental communication unit of the card unit 750) for receiving a return request signal (for example, step S202 in FIG. 53) transmitted by the operation of the return operation receiving means;
Timing means (for example, step S205 in FIG. 53) for starting timing based on reception of the return request signal,
When the discharge control means is set to execute the first return process by the return setting means (for example, in the case of YES in step S204 of FIG. 53), the time measured by the time measuring means becomes a predetermined time. The recording medium is ejected on the condition that the confirmation operation has been received before (for example, it is determined that the confirmation button is operated in step S208 before it is determined that the time is up in step S207 in FIG. 53). Control.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine simply performs a normal process of transmitting a return request signal by operating the return operation accepting means, it is not necessary to change the gaming machine and a game recording medium for others Theft can be difficult.

(1-19) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-15) to (1-18) above,
The gaming device further includes:
Display setting means for setting whether or not to display a warning regarding discharge of the recording medium (for example, “whether or not to display a warning” set in the card management computer 500, the medal lending machine 100, or the card unit 750) Control unit 181 for storing the RAM of the card unit),
Display means for performing the alert display (for example, D0 in FIG. 52) based on the fact that the alert display is set by the display setting means (for example, in the case of YES in step S301 in FIG. 52) For example, a liquid crystal display 123 and a touch panel display 7123) are provided.

  According to such a configuration, a warning display can be performed regardless of whether the first return process or the second return process is performed.

(1-20) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-15) to (1-19) above,
The gaming device further includes:
Return operation notifying means (for example, a liquid crystal display 123, a touch panel display 7123) for notifying that the return operation has been received by the return operation receiving means (for example, D1 in FIG. 53) is provided.

  According to such a configuration, the player can discover that another person has operated the return operation accepting means.

(1-21) The above management device (1-1) or (1-2), (1-3) or (1-4) gaming system, (1-5) to (1-20) In any management device or gaming system,
The gaming device further includes:
An available processing means (for example, FIG. 58) that performs usable processing (for example, remaining number storage processing) for making the received received value (for example, received amount) usable for the game based on the receipt of the money. Step S117, step S108),
Use processing means (for example, step S135 of FIG. 58) that performs use processing (for example, ball lending processing) that uses the usable value (for example, the remaining number) made available by the usable processing for lending the game medium. )When,
Discharge control means (for example, step S126 of FIG. 58) for discharging the recording medium that can specify the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the use value used in the use process from the usable value;
The usable processing means, as the usable processing, converts all of the received value as a condition on condition that the received value is less than a predetermined value (for example, NO is determined in step S116 in FIG. 58). It is a condition that all usable processes to be usable values are performed (for example, step S117 in FIG. 58) and that the received value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, YES is determined in step S116 in FIG. 58). As described above, a partially usable process is performed in which a part of the received value is used as the usable value (for example, step S118 in FIG. 58),
The discharge control means discharges the recording medium on the basis of accepting the return operation (for example, it is determined YES in step S125 of FIG. 58), while the partially usable process is performed. On the basis of this, a return process at the time of value reception for discharging the recording medium that can specify the remaining amount that has not been made the usable value of the received value without accepting the return operation (for example, 58, step S119).

  According to such a configuration, if the reception value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the partial usable process is performed in which a part of the reception value is used, and the usable value of the reception value is Return processing at the time of value reception for returning a recording medium that can specify the remaining amount that has not been performed is performed. For this reason, in order to use the remaining amount for the game, it is necessary to accept a recording medium. As a result, overuse of value for games can be prevented.

(1-22) In the management device or game system according to (1-21) above,
The predetermined value is an amount corresponding to a money of a high denomination set in advance (for example, 10,000 yen banknote).

  According to such a structure, when a money of a high denomination is received, a partially usable process and a return process at the time of receiving a value are performed. As a result, overuse of value for games can be prevented.

(1-23) In the management device or game system according to (1-21) or (1-22) above,
The gaming device further includes:
A cumulative value specifying processing means (for example, step S136 in FIG. 58) is provided that performs a cumulative value specifying process for enabling the player to specify the cumulative value that is the cumulative value of use.

  According to such a configuration, various processes based on the accumulated value that is the accumulated value of use can be performed.

(1-24) Management device of (1-1) or (1-2) above, (1-3) or (1-4) gaming system, (1-5) to (1-20) In any management device or gaming system,
The gaming device further includes:
An available processing means (for example, FIG. 58) that performs usable processing (for example, remaining number storage processing) for making the received received value (for example, received amount) usable for the game based on the receipt of the money. Step S117, step S108),
Use processing means (for example, step of FIG. 58) that performs use processing (for example, ball lending processing) that uses the usable value (for example, the remaining number) made available by the usable processing for lending the game medium. S135)
Ejection control means (for example, step S126 in FIG. 58) for ejecting the recording medium that can specify the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the use value used in the use process from the usable value;
Cumulative value specifying processing means (for example, step S136 of FIG. 58) for performing a cumulative value specifying process for making it possible to specify for each player the cumulative value that is the cumulative value of use.
The discharge control means discharges the recording medium on the basis of receiving the return operation (for example, it is determined YES in step S125 of FIG. 58), and receives the money (for example, FIG. 58), the return operation is performed on condition that the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, YES is determined in step S116 ′ in FIG. 58). The value reception return process for discharging the recording medium that can specify a part or all of the received value is performed without receiving (for example, step S119 in FIG. 58).

  According to such a configuration, when the value is accepted, if the accumulated value that is the accumulated value of use is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a recording medium that can specify a part or all of the accepted value is returned. Return processing at the time of value reception is performed. For this reason, in order to use the returned value for a game, it is necessary to accept a recording medium. As a result, overuse of value for games can be prevented.

(1-25) In the management device or game system according to (1-23) or (1-24) above,
The gaming device further includes:
The accumulated value is equal to or greater than a certain value, the time during which the game is played is equal to or greater than a certain time, or a predetermined time has elapsed during the game (eg, YES is determined in step S131 in FIG. 58). On the condition that the accumulated value is displayed, the accumulated value display means (for example, liquid crystal display 123, display 7123, step S132 in FIG. 58) is provided.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the accumulated value, thereby preventing overuse of the value for the game.

(1-26) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-23) to (1-25) above,
The use processing means performs the use process based on accepting a use operation (for example, an operation of the lending button 116 and the ball lending button 751) (for example, YES is determined in step S122 in FIG. 58). And a specific operation that accepts the use operation and is different from the use operation on condition that the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a certain value (for example, YES is determined in step S131 in FIG. 58). For example, the use process is performed based on the fact that the operation of the confirmation button is further accepted (for example, YES is determined in step S133 in FIG. 58).

  According to such a configuration, if the cumulative value is equal to or greater than a certain value, the number of operations for performing usage processing increases. As a result, overuse of value for games can be prevented.

(1-27) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-23) to (1-26) above,
The gaming device further includes:
Value reception prohibition processing means for performing value reception prohibition processing for prohibiting reception of money on condition that the cumulative value is equal to or greater than a specific value (for example, YES is determined in step S114 of FIG. 58). (For example, step S115 in FIG. 58).

  According to such a configuration, if the accumulated value is equal to or greater than the specific value, acceptance of the value is prohibited. As a result, overuse of value for games can be prevented.

(1-28) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-23) to (1-27) above,
The gaming device further includes:
Commodity notifying means (for example, a liquid crystal display 123, a display 7123, and step S132 in FIG. 58) for notifying commodities corresponding to the accumulated value is provided.

  According to such a structure, the goods purchased with the value used for the game are notified. As a result, overuse of value for games can be prevented.

(1-29) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-21) to (1-28) above,
The usage processing means performs the usage processing based on receiving a usage operation (for example, an operation of the lending button 116 and the ball lending button 751), and the time during which the game is played is a predetermined time or more. Or a specific operation that accepts the use operation and is different from the use operation on condition that a predetermined time has elapsed during the game (for example, YES is determined in step S131 in FIG. 58). Based on the fact that (for example, the operation of the confirmation button) is further accepted (for example, YES is determined in step S133 in FIG. 58), the use process is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the number of operations for performing the use process increases if the time during which the game is played exceeds a certain time, or if a predetermined time has elapsed during the game. As a result, overuse of value for games can be prevented.

(1-30) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-21) to (1-29) above,
The discharge control means performs a value reception return specifying process that makes it possible to specify that the recording medium is discharged in the value reception return process (for example, step S120 in FIG. 58),
The gaming device further includes:
Attention alerting means (for example, alerting alerting means) based on accepting the recording medium subjected to the return acceptance processing at the time of accepting value (for example, it is determined YES in step S106 in FIG. 58) , A liquid crystal display 123, a display 7123, and step S107 in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, a notification that calls attention is given when the recording medium returned in the return processing at the time of value reception is received. As a result, overuse of value for games can be prevented.

(1-31) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-21) to (1-30) above,
The predetermined value of a different value can be set for each player (for example, in a predetermined amount table).

  According to such a configuration, for example, overuse of the value to the game can be prevented for a low-income person or a player who is easily overused.

(1-32) (1-1) or (1-2) management device, (1-3) or (1-4) gaming system, (1-5) to (1-31) In any management device or gaming system,
The gaming device further includes:
A storage unit (for example, medal storage unit 183) capable of storing the game medium (for example, medal M);
A payout device (for example, a payout device 182) for paying out game media stored in the storage unit;
A counting device capable of counting gaming media (eg, counting device 190);
An opening (for example, the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 in FIG. 9A) capable of receiving a game medium to be counted by the counting device;
An introduction path (for example, an introduction path cover 141) for guiding the game medium thrown into the opening to the counting device;
An open state (for example, the open position shown in FIG. 9 (a)) that allows the game medium to be received from the opening and a closed state (for example, FIG. 9 (b)) that makes it impossible or difficult to receive the game medium. A closed body (for example, a lid member 160 in FIG. 9) provided to be changeable to a closed position),
Maintenance means for maintaining the lid in the closed state (for example, screw 107, screw insertion holes 108a and 108b, female screw hole 162 in FIG. 12, screw 107 'in FIG. 17, screw insertion hole 108c, female screw hole 162' / Engagement projections 172 and engagement holes 173) biased by the spring 177 and the like in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally throwing the game medium into the opening or intentionally throwing dust or the like by closing the lid. In addition, when changing from an operation mode that uses a counting device to an operation mode that does not use a counting device in a game store, it is possible to prevent the insertion of game media without replacing the gaming device, etc., simply by closing the lid. In addition, the lid can be prevented from being easily opened.

(1-33) In the management device or game system according to (1-32) above,
The lid is
It is rotatable about an axis (for example, pivot 161 in FIG. 9) that intersects two opposing side wall surfaces (for example, the inner surface side of the side plate 141b in FIG. 9) among the wall surfaces forming the inside of the introduction path. A main lid (for example, lid plate 160a in FIG. 9) provided on
A lid side wall portion (for example, a lid member side plate 160b in FIG. 9) provided at both ends of the main lid portion and facing the two side wall surfaces, respectively.
The lid side wall portion is provided so as to overlap the two side wall surfaces when the opening (for example, the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 in FIG. 9) is closed by the main lid portion. (For example, in FIG. 9B and FIG. 11B, when the lid member 160 is closed, the lid member side plate 160b on the right side of the lid member 160 is connected to the side plate 141b on the right side of the introduction path cover 141. In FIG. 12B, the lid member side plate 160b on the left side of the lid member 160 is superimposed on the left side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141).

  According to such a structure, since it becomes impossible to touch a cover part side wall part by two side wall surfaces in a closed state, it can prevent that a cover part side wall part is operated and it is made into an open state.

(1-34) In the management device or game system according to (1-32) or (1-33),
The maintaining means (for example, the screw 107, the screw insertion holes 108a and 108b, the female screw hole 162 of FIG. 12, and the screw 107 ′, the screw insertion hole 108c, and the female screw hole 162 ′ of FIG. 17)
A fixing means (for example, screw 107 in FIG. 12) capable of fixing the lid in the introduction path;
An operation portion (for example, a screw head of the screw 107) for bringing the fixing means into a fixed state or a released state;
The operation unit is arranged on a side surface (for example, the left and right side surfaces) or a back surface (for example, the back surface) of the outer wall surface of the introduction path other than the player side (for example, in FIG. 12, a screw 107 is inserted). Screw insertion holes 108a and 108b are provided in the left side plate 141b of the receiving portion 140, and a female screw hole 162 into which the screw 107 inserted through the screw insertion holes 108a and 108b is screwed is formed on the side surface of the lid member side plate 160b. In FIG. 17, a screw insertion hole 108c through which the screw 107 ′ is inserted is provided in the opening / closing plate 102 on the back side of the receiving portion 140, and a female screw 107 to which the screw 107 ′ inserted through the screw insertion hole 108c is screwed is provided. A hole 162 'is provided at the tip of the lid member side plate 160b).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to release the closed state of the lid.

(1-35) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-32) to (1-34) above,
On the inner surface of the introduction path, there are peripheral portions of the opening (for example, in FIG. 9A, the outer peripheral surface of the introduction path cover 141 in the vicinity of the opening 140 ′ of the receiving part 140 and the vicinity of the receiving part 140 in the opening / closing plate ) Are provided with high brightness portions (for example, high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ in FIG. 9A) having a higher brightness than the color of ().

  According to such a configuration, even if the lighting in the game store where the gaming machine is installed is dark, the player can put the game medium into the opening by relying on the high brightness part.

(1-36) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-32) to (1-35) above,
The opening is formed upward to accept a game medium from above,
The lid is
Among the wall surfaces forming the inside of the introduction path, it is rotatable about an axis (for example, the pivot 161 of FIG. 9) intersecting two opposing side wall surfaces (for example, the inner surface of the side plate 141b of FIG. 9). A provided main lid (for example, lid plate 160a in FIG. 9);
A lid side wall portion (for example, lid member side plate 160b in FIG. 9) provided at both ends of the main lid portion and facing the two side wall surfaces, respectively.
In the lid, the main lid is maintained at a predetermined opening angle in the opened state to guide the game medium to the opening side, and the side wall of the lid projects upward from the main lid in the opened state. Formed,
Of the two side wall surfaces, the upper end of one side wall surface provided on the corresponding gaming machine side is formed higher than the upper end of the other side wall surface (for example, in FIG. 7 and FIG. The height position of the upper edge of the side plate 141b is different, and the left and right side plates 141b are provided with a height difference of the vertical dimension V).
Of the two lid side walls, the upper end of one lid side wall provided on the corresponding gaming machine side is formed higher than the upper end of the other lid side wall (for example, FIG. 7 and FIG. 9 (a), the height positions of the upper end edges of the left and right lid member side plates 160b are different, and the left lid member side plate 160b is formed higher than the lid member side plate 160b provided on the right side. .

  According to such a configuration, when the player holds the game medium and inserts the game medium from the opening, the little finger side of the hand holding the game medium is not easily disturbed by the other side wall surface and the other lid side wall portion. Thus, the game medium can be smoothly inserted, and the inserted game medium hits one side wall surface and one lid side wall portion formed so as to be guided into the introduction path. Splashing of game media is prevented.

(1-37) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-32) to (1-36) above,
The bottom of the introduction path includes a first bottom surface (for example, an inclined plate 141c ′ in FIG. 13) in which a plurality of small-diameter through holes (for example, punching holes 148 and 148 ′ in FIG. 13) are formed, and the first bottom surface. A second bottom surface portion (for example, the inclined plate 141c of FIG. 13) disposed so as to overlap the lower portion of the portion,
The first bottom surface portion and the second bottom surface portion are disposed by shifting the positions of the through hole of the first bottom surface portion and the through hole of the second bottom surface portion (for example, in FIG. The bottom of the cover 141 is provided with a lower inclined plate 141c and an upper inclined plate 141c ′ arranged to be separated from the inclined plate 141c by a predetermined distance.

  According to such a configuration, when a liquid or the like is introduced into the opening, the liquid flows out from the through hole in the bottom surface portion, and the liquid can be prevented from entering the counting device. Also, even if an attempt is made to insert a fraudulent member such as a wire from the through hole in the bottom portion toward the counting device, the upper through hole and the lower through hole are alternately arranged. Can be blocked.

(1-38) In the management device or game system according to any of (1-32) to (1-37) above,
On the entrance side of the opening, a light emitting unit (for example, the light emitting unit 165 of FIG. 5) that emits light when the counting device (for example, the counting device 190 of FIG. 5) counts game media is provided.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the game medium is counted by the counting device. In addition, since it is possible to notify surrounding players by emitting light that a large amount of game media has been paid out by the corresponding gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the production effect and to gather the gaze of surrounding players In this way, it is possible to prevent unauthorized gaming media or the like from being inserted into the opening.

(1-39) In the management device or game system according to (1-38) above,
The light emitting unit (for example, the light emitting unit 165 in FIG. 9B) is concealed by the lid when the lid is in the closed state (for example, the lid member 160 is closed in FIG. 9B). In this state, the light emitting unit 165 is concealed by the lid member 160).

  According to such a configuration, since the light emitting unit is concealed by the lid when the lid is in the closed state, the light emitting unit can be protected by the lid.

(1-40) (1-1) or (1-2) management device, (1-3) or (1-4) gaming system, (1-5) to (1-39) In any management device or gaming system,
The gaming device further includes:
An appropriateness determining means for determining whether or not the game medium is appropriate (for example, the controller 190a of the counting device 190);
A storage unit (for example, a medal storage box 194) that stores game media determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination means;
First determination means for determining whether or not the storage amount of the game medium stored in the storage unit has reached a first storage amount that prompts the collection of the game medium (for example, in Se7 of medal storage processing in FIG. 37, The control unit 181 determines whether or not the total medal storage number of the medal information (see FIG. 20C) is the first threshold (full tank),
First notifying means for notifying that the first storage amount has been reached when the first determination means determines that the first storage amount has been reached (for example, in Se9 of medal storage processing in FIG. 37, the control unit 181 is a portion for lighting the state notification lamp 111),
Second determination means for determining whether or not the storage amount of the game medium stored in the storage unit has reached a predetermined second storage amount that is smaller than the first storage amount (for example, the tightening-related processing in FIG. 38). In Sf2, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the total number of medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (second threshold).
When the game hall is closed, when the predetermined signal output from the management device that manages the gaming device is received, it is determined by the second determination means that the second storage amount has been reached. On the condition, the second notification means for notifying that the second storage amount has been reached (for example, in Sf3 of the tightening related process in FIG. 38, the control unit 181 lights the state notification lamp 111 and A portion for transmitting a notification notifying the management computer 550 that the number of illegal medals stored in the medal storage box 194 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (second threshold).

  According to such a configuration, when an inappropriate game medium reaches the first storage amount, the fact is notified, so that the game medium can be collected from the storage unit and at least the game hall is closed. At that time, when the second storage amount is reached, the fact is notified, so that it is possible not only to collect an inappropriate game medium in the stage before reaching the first storage amount, but also to have a margin for storage. Since it is not necessary to collect the game medium from a certain storage unit, the work efficiency of the collection is improved. Therefore, since the storage amount of the game medium reaches the first storage amount during business hours, it is possible to circulate without properly collecting the game medium from the storage unit that has reached the first storage amount. Can be prevented.

(1-41) In the gaming system or gaming system including the management device according to (1-40) above,
The gaming system
A management device (for example, a medal management computer 550) is connected to each gaming device so as to be able to perform data communication, and transmits a predetermined signal to each gaming device when the game room is closed.

  According to such a configuration, when an inappropriate game medium reaches the first storage amount, the fact is notified, so that the game medium can be collected from the storage unit and at least the game hall is closed. At that time, when the second storage amount is reached, the fact is notified, so that it is possible not only to collect an inappropriate game medium in the stage before reaching the first storage amount, but also to have a margin for storage. Since it is not necessary to collect the game medium from a certain storage unit, the work efficiency of the collection is improved. Therefore, since the storage amount of the game medium reaches the first storage amount during business hours, it is possible to circulate without properly collecting the game medium from the storage unit that has reached the first storage amount. Can be prevented.

(1-42) In the management device or gaming system according to (1-40) or (1-41) above,
The gaming device further includes:
Storage medium counting means for counting the number of game media stored in the storage unit (for example, in Se4 of medal storage processing of FIG. 37, the control unit 181 determines the total number of medal storage of medal information (see FIG. 20C)). To add 1 to), and
The game medium type setting means (for example, a medal having a different size (for example, a medal having a diameter of 25 mm) that can set any one of a plurality of types of game media having different sizes as the game medium determined to be appropriate by the appropriateness determining means. And a controller 190a) of the counting device 190 that can also be compared and identified for medals of φ30),
The first determination means determines that the first storage amount has been reached when the number of game media counted by the storage medium counting means reaches a first threshold (for example, in Se7 of medal storage processing in FIG. 37). The control unit 181 determines whether or not the total number of medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) is the first threshold (full tank).
The second determination means determines that the second storage amount has been reached when the number of game media counted by the storage medium counting means reaches a second threshold (for example, in Sf2 of the tightening-related processing in FIG. 38). The control unit 181 determines whether or not the total number of medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (second threshold)).
The gaming device further includes:
Threshold setting means capable of setting the first threshold and / or the second threshold (for example, an illegal medal related setting screen shown in FIG. 27 on which an illegal medal related setting that can be performed by the medal management computer 550) can be performed. ,
The threshold value setting means can set a threshold value corresponding to the type of game medium set by the game medium type setting means (for example, by using “island unit setting” shown in FIG. 27, 5 yen per sheet) A portion that can be designated for each gaming island, such as a game area in which a game can be performed with a medal worth of or a game area in which a game can be played with a medal worth 20 yen per piece).

  According to such a configuration, even when the same number of game media are stored, the storage amount changes according to the size of the game media, so an appropriate level can be obtained by changing the threshold value according to the size of the game media. Can be notified.

(1-43) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-40) to (1-42),
The appropriateness determination means is a game medium that is determined to be inappropriate, and is a first inappropriate game medium that can be used in the game hall (for example, a local store medal) and a second inappropriate game that cannot be used in the game hall. Multiple types of inappropriate gaming media (e.g., illegal medals) including gaming media (e.g., fake medals),
The gaming device further includes:
Registration means for registering the type of improper game medium necessary for identification by the appropriateness determination means (for example, about 100 own store medals are put in the counting device 190 in advance and the image of the own store medals is registered in the memory 190b. Part) and
Storage medium counting means for counting the number of game media stored in the storage unit (for example, in Se4 of medal storage processing of FIG. 37, the control unit 181 determines the total number of medal storage of medal information (see FIG. 20C)). To add 1 to), and
The storage medium counting means separately counts the first inappropriate game medium and the second inappropriate game medium registered by the registration means when it is determined that the appropriate determination means determines that the storage medium count means is not appropriate ( For example, in Se5 of the medal storage process of FIG. 37, the control unit 181 determines whether or not it is the own store medal, and if it is the own store medal, the process proceeds to Se6 and medal information (see FIG. 20C). 1 is added to the own store medal storage number, and if it is not the own store medal, the process proceeds to Se11, where 1 is added to the false medal storage number of the medal information (see FIG. 20 (c)).

  According to such a configuration, it becomes easier to grasp the amount of game media in the game hall out of the inappropriate game media stored in the storage unit, so that it is quickly collected and determined as an appropriate game media. It is possible to return to the area to be processed.

(1-44) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-40) to (1-43),
The gaming device further includes:
Game medium imaging means (for example, medal shooting camera 190c) for imaging a game medium to be determined by the appropriateness determination means;
A player imaging means (for example, a face image capturing camera 188) for imaging a player playing a game on a corresponding gaming machine;
Image data storage means for storing the game medium data obtained by imaging the game medium targeted for the determination and the player data obtained by imaging the player in association with each other when it is determined that the appropriate determination means is not appropriate ( For example, in Sd3 of the illegal medal process of FIG. 36, the control unit 181 generates a single notification image (see FIG. 29) by combining the player's face image and the medal image in parallel, and this notification image is displayed. A portion stored in the RAM 181b).

  According to such a configuration, since it is possible to specify which of the game media stored in the storage unit a predetermined player has used, it becomes easy to specify fraud.

(1-45) In the management device or game system according to any one of (1-40) to (1-44) above,
The appropriateness determining means determines whether or not the game media counted by the counting device for counting the game media received from a predetermined receiving unit is appropriate (for example, the counting in FIG. 35). In the process Sc6, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the counted medal is an illegal medal based on the medal determination information acquired from the counting device 190).
The counting device includes:
On the condition that a predetermined inappropriate condition (for example, illegal medal detection notification condition) is satisfied based on the determination result by the appropriate determination means, the appropriateness among the number of game media counted until the inappropriate condition is satisfied Invalidating means for invalidating the number of game media determined to be inappropriate by the determining means (for example, in Sd8 of illegal medal processing in FIG. 36, the control unit 181 has a card table (see FIG. 20A)). A portion for subtracting the cumulative illegal medal value from the medal number).

  According to such a configuration, when an inappropriate game medium is included in the counted game media that are paid out from the gaming machine, the inappropriate game media are also counted unless an inappropriate condition is satisfied. It is prevented that a player who uses an unsuitable game medium unintentionally suffers a disadvantage, and if the improper condition is satisfied, the number of game media counted so far becomes invalid. It is possible to prevent the game media from being acquired.

(1-46) In the management device or gaming system according to (1-45) above,
The gaming device further includes:
The number of counted game media counted by the counting device until a predetermined improper condition (for example, illegal medal detection notification condition) is satisfied based on the determination result by the appropriate determination means regardless of the determination result by the appropriate determination means. (For example, in Sd6 of illegal medal processing in FIG. 36, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information (see FIG. 20B)). ,
When the count recording medium, which is a recording medium capable of specifying the count game medium number, is received and the count game medium number can be specified by the count record medium, the specified count game medium number is stored in the storage means. Storage processing means (for example, in the card acceptance processing of Sb20 in FIG. 30), the control unit 181 (storage processing means) of the medal lending machine 100 includes the number of medals and the number of saved medals included in the received acceptance processing completion notification. (Members only), store visit points (members only), PIN (members only) are stored in the card table),
A discharge processing means for performing a discharge process of discharging the counting recording medium in which the number of counting game media can be specified when the game is ended;
The discharge processing means discharges a count recording medium in which information capable of specifying the number of game media stored in the storage unit is recorded out of the number of count game media stored in the storage means (for example, FIG. 30). In the return processing of Sb23, the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the card being received is a visitor card. If the card is a visitor card, the card on the card table is included in the visitor card. The part that records the cumulative number of illegal medals in the game information being received).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp and manage how many gaming media are not appropriate for a predetermined player.

(1-47) (1-1) or (1-2) management device, (1-3) or (1-4) gaming system, (1-5) to (1-46) In any management device or gaming system,
The gaming device is communicably connected to the gaming machine and the management device,
The gaming device further includes:
Comprising transmission means for transmitting information generated by the gaming machine to the management device;
The transmission means includes information conversion means (for example, an external output terminal) for converting the information generated by the gaming machine to the management apparatus and transmitting or relaying the information to the conversion apparatus.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming device is communicably connected to the gaming machine and the management device, and information generated by the gaming machine is converted and transmitted to the management device by the gaming device or converted. Relayed to the device. For this reason, even if the information generated by the gaming machine is not information for the conventional management device, the information generated by the gaming machine is converted for the conventional management device, so that the conventional management device can be used. .

(1-48) (1-1) or (1-2) management device, (1-3) or (1-4) gaming system, (1-5) to (1-47) In any management device or gaming system,
The gaming machine is capable of giving a predetermined game point by generating a prize and playing a game using the game point,
The gaming device further includes:
Based on accepting the lending operation, game point transmitting means (for example, a card unit 750) that transmits information that can identify a game point to be added using at least a part of the accepted money to the gaming machine. Thus, based on the fact that the operation of the ball lending button 751 is accepted, information that can specify the game points to be added using at least a part of the accepted money is transmitted to the pachinko gaming machine 701.) When,
Based on accepting the counting operation, the game point receiving means (for example, each card counter 705 by the card unit 750 receives the information that can identify the game points stored in the gaming machine from the gaming machine). Based on the reception of the counting operation, information that can specify the game points stored in the pachinko gaming machine 701 is received from the pachinko gaming machine 701.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can give a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a prize and can play a game using the game point. Based on the fact that the lending operation is accepted by the gaming device. Based on the fact that information that can specify the game points to be added using at least a part of the accepted money is transmitted to the gaming machine and the counting operation is accepted, the gaming points stored in the gaming machine are The identifiable information is received from the gaming machine. For this reason, it is possible to provide a gaming apparatus capable of providing a predetermined gaming point by the occurrence of a winning and corresponding to a gaming machine capable of playing a game using the gaming point.

(1-49) (1-1) or (1-2) management device, (1-3) or (1-4) gaming system, (1-5) to (1-48) In any management device or gaming system,
The gaming device is communicably connected to the gaming machine and a management device (eg, key management server 600),
The gaming device further includes:
Authentication data transfer means (for example, an authentication / communication control circuit 7501) for transferring data in communication exchange between the gaming machine and the management device for authenticating the gaming machine is provided.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming device is communicably connected to the gaming machine and the management device, and data is transferred by the gaming device in the exchange of communication between the gaming machine and the management device for authenticating the gaming machine. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming device that can contribute to improving the security of the gaming machine.

(1-50) (1-1) or (1-2) management device, (1-3) or (1-4) gaming system, (1-5) to (1-49) In any management device or gaming system,
The management device further includes receiving means for receiving a signal output from the gaming machine and indicating the launch strength of the game medium.

  According to such a configuration, information related to the emission intensity can be totaled in the management device.

(1-51) (1-1) or (1-2) management device, (1-3) or (1-4) gaming system, (1-5) to (1-50) In any management device or gaming system,
The management device further includes receiving means for receiving a changing signal output from the gaming machine and indicating that a plurality of pieces of identification information that can be identified are displayed in a changing manner.

  According to such a configuration, information corresponding to the fact that the identification information is changing can be totaled in the management device.

It is a system configuration figure showing the whole picture of a game system in an embodiment. It is a front view showing a slot machine and a medal lending machine. It is a left view which shows the internal mechanism of a medal lending machine. It is a perspective view which shows the principal part of a slot machine and a medal lending machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the front plate of the medal lending machine. It is a partially broken left view which shows the structure of the principal part of a medal lending machine. It is a principal part front view which shows a medal lending machine. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. (A) is a perspective view which shows the receiving part of an open state, (b) is a perspective view which shows the receiving part of a closed state. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a counting device. (A) is a vertical side view showing the receiving part in the open state, (b) is a vertical side view showing the receiving part in the closed state. (A) is the side view which shows the receiving part of an open state, and aa sectional drawing of a receiving part, (b) is the side view which shows the receiving part of a closed state, and bb sectional drawing of a receiving part. It is a vertical side view which shows the bottom part of an introduction path | route cover. It is a top view which shows the arrangement | positioning state of a slot machine and a medal lending machine. It is a principal part front view which shows the medal lending machine as a modification. It is a partial longitudinal cross-sectional view of the medal lending machine of FIG. It is a vertical side view which shows the maintenance means as a modification. It is a vertical front view which shows the maintenance means as a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a medal lending machine. (A) is a figure which shows the card table of a medal lending machine, (b) is a figure which shows the game information during card reception of a medal lending machine, (c) shows the medal information of a medal lending machine. It is a figure and (d) is a figure which shows the counter information of a medal lending machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a card management computer. (A) is a figure which shows the membership card table of a card management computer, (b) is a figure which shows the visitor card table of a card management computer. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a medal management computer. (A) is a figure which shows the member saving management table of a medal management computer, (b) is a figure which shows the visitor saving management table of a medal management computer. It is a figure which shows the unit management table of a medal management computer. (A) is a figure which shows the member information table of a medal management computer, (b) is a figure which shows the game history table classified by member of a medal management computer. It is a figure which shows the unauthorized medal relation setting screen in a medal management computer. It is a figure which shows the business end process screen in a medal management computer. It is a figure which shows the unauthorized medal user face image screen in a medal management computer. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the card | curd acceptance process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the issue / payment process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the return process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the card lock collation process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the replay process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the counting process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the illegal medal process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the medal storage process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the tightening related process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a display screen figure which shows an example of the menu screen displayed on the display of a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the touch panel operation processing performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the remaining amount extraction process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the post card insertion process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the card lock process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the coin splitting process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the information inquiry process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a display screen figure which shows an example of the possession ball and storage ball information screen displayed on the display of a medal lending machine. It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine and card unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the pachinko game machine and card unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the signal transmitted / received between the pachinko machines in the ball lending command process which the card unit in 3rd Embodiment performs. It is a figure showing an example of the setting screen displayed on the display of the card management computer in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of the alerting display process which the card unit in 3rd Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart showing an example of the return process which the card unit in 3rd Embodiment performs. It is a figure showing an example of the predetermined amount table which the card unit in a 4th embodiment has memorized. It is a figure showing an example of the display reference amount corresponding goods table which the card unit in a 4th embodiment has memorized. It is a figure showing an example of card DB which the card management computer in 4th Embodiment has memorize | stored. It is a figure showing an example of player DB which the hall computer in 4th Embodiment has memorize | stored. It is a flowchart showing an example of the process which the card unit in 4th Embodiment performs. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the authentication of the enclosure type game machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when lending the ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting game balls in a 5th embodiment. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the hall | hole server and hall control connected with P stand and CU in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram for demonstrating another structure of the hall | hole server and hall control connected with P stand and CU in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the transmission process of the number of addition balls by the CU control part in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the transmission process of the game information by the CU control part in 5th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. An embodiment of the gaming system of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, FIG. 1 is a system configuration diagram showing an overall image of the gaming system of the embodiment of the present invention. The gaming system mainly includes a slot machine 1, a medal lending machine 100, a card management computer 500, a medal management computer 550, a hall computer 540, a call lamp 200, a gift exchange POS 570, and a checkout device 580. It is configured.

  The slot machine 1 is a gaming machine that is arranged in parallel on each gaming island (not shown) arranged in the game hall. The medal lending machine 100 is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the slot machine 1 at a predetermined side position of the slot machine 1 and is issued mainly for general players who are not registered as members. Accepts visitor cards (counting recording media) with a prepaid function, which are game recording media, and membership cards (counting recording media), which are game recording media issued to member players registered as members of the gaming machine In addition, the medal acquired as a result of the process for renting out a medal, which is a game medium used for gaming in the gaming machine, and the game in the corresponding slot machine 1 is counted, and within the range of the counted medal number It is a gaming apparatus of the present invention for paying out (returning) medals. The card management computer 500 manages a visitor card and a membership card used in the medal lending machine 100, the medal lending machine 100, and the like. The medal management computer 550 manages the number of medals counted in each medal lending machine 100, and the number of saved medals owned by a member player possessing a membership card so that it can be used again (hereinafter also referred to as the number of balls). And the management device of the present invention that manages the number of medals held on the visitor card (hereinafter also referred to as the number of possessed balls). The hall computer 540 manages game information such as table data of each slot machine 1 installed in the game hall.

  The call lamp 200 receives an operation button for calling a store clerk of the game hall, and information on the game from the gaming machine, and the game situation such as the number of jackpots and big bonuses, the number of rotations from the previous jackpot and big bonuses, etc. And a display unit for displaying a game history and the like. The prize exchange POS 570 is installed at a counter where a game shop clerk is present, and is operated by the shop clerk to exchange the game value corresponding to the number of medals and the number of stored medals associated with a membership card or a visitor card with a prize. To execute the process. The payment apparatus 580 receives a membership card or a visitor card, and executes a process for adjusting the remaining amount of the prepaid associated with these cards to cash.

  And each apparatus which comprises these gaming systems of this embodiment is connected so that bidirectional | two-way data communication is possible via the hub (HUB) 70 and the communication cable 80, as shown in FIG. Each connected device is assigned a local IP address to form a local area network (LAN), and each of these devices connected to the local area network (LAN) can be individually identified. Each device has an IP address table in which each device (unit) ID is associated with a local IP address, a unit management table (see FIG. 25) described later, and the like. (Unit) By assigning each local IP address specified by the ID to the transmission data and transmitting / receiving it, each other It has to be able to perform the transmission and reception of data.

  The card management computer 500 according to the present embodiment manages the prepaid balance (game value) remaining in each member card and each visitor card as described above, and these are also transmitted via the communication line 81. It is connected to a management server 82 installed in a card management company outside the amusement hall that manages membership cards and visitor cards so that bidirectional data communication can be performed. From the card management computer 500 to these management servers 82, By transmitting various kinds of management information, the card management company can grasp the sales by the membership card and the visitor card of each game hall by the management server 82.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a monitoring camera system 21 for monitoring the inside of the game hall is connected to the hall computer 540 of the present embodiment, and the inside of the gaming hall imaged by the monitoring camera system 21 is connected. The monitoring image is stored and managed together with the base data of each slot machine 1 and the like. Furthermore, the hall computer 540 of the present embodiment is connected to a wireless broadcast system 20 that controls the income 9 used by the store clerk of the game hall. The hall computer 540 is connected to the store employee's income via the radio broadcast system 20. 9 can send an automatic voice message.

  Next, a slot machine that is an example of a gaming machine and a medal lending machine that is an example of a gaming device will be described. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 1 and the medal lending machine. FIG. 3 is a left side view showing the internal mechanism of the medal lending machine. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing main parts of the slot machine and the medal lending machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a state where the front plate of the medal lending machine is opened. FIG. 6 is a partially broken left side view showing the structure of the main part of the medal lending machine. FIG. 7 is a main part front view showing the medal lending machine. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 9A is a perspective view showing the receiving part in the open state, and FIG. 9B is a perspective view showing the receiving part in the closed state. 11A is a longitudinal side view showing the receiving part in the open state, and FIG. 11B is a vertical side view showing the receiving part in the closed state. 12A is a side view showing the receiving part in the open state and aa sectional view of the receiving part, and FIG. 12B is a side view showing the receiving part in the closed state and bb sectional view of the receiving part. is there. FIG. 13 is a longitudinal side view showing the bottom of the introduction path cover. FIG. 14 is a plan view showing an arrangement state of the slot machine and the medal lending machine.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of slot machines 1 are juxtaposed on a plurality of game islands (not shown) arranged in the amusement hall, and a housing 1a having an open front surface and a left side of the housing 1a. The front door 1b is pivotally supported by the front door 1b. The reels 2L, 2C and 2R having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction at the upper position inside the housing 1a. Of the symbols arranged on these reels 2L, 2C and 2R, Three consecutive symbols are arranged so that they can be seen from the perspective window 3.

  When a game (game) is performed in the slot machine 1, first, a medal M, which is an example of a disk-shaped game medium, is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, or a bet number is set using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 are valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. In the present embodiment, when the prescribed number of bets is set to three regardless of the gaming state and the prescribed number of bets is set, the pay lines L1 to L5 become valid. In addition, when the medal M is inserted exceeding the maximum number among the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the see-through window 3 of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is a winning symbol combination. Here, only the winning line L set across the symbols arranged in the lower stage of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is defined as the winning line. In the present embodiment, one winning line is used, but a plurality of winning lines may be defined.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is finished, and a predetermined symbol combination (also called a combination) in one of the pay lines L1 to L5 is used for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. When the display result is stopped, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals M are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (for example, 50), the medal M is paid directly to the lower plate 5 provided so as to protrude forward from the medal payout opening 9 to the lower part of the front door 1b. It is like that. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the winning lines L1 to L5, a gaming state (for example, according to the combination of symbols (for example, Regular bonuses and big bonus bonuses).

  Next, the medal lending machine 100 will be described. The medal lending machine 100 is provided in the slot machine 1 so as to correspond one-to-one. In the present embodiment, a medal lending machine 100 corresponding to one slot machine 1 is arranged on the right side of the slot machine 1. In this embodiment, the medal lending machine 100 is provided so as to correspond to the slot machine 1 on a one-to-one basis. For example, the medal lending machine 100 is provided between the two slot machines 1 and 1. A single medal lending machine 100 may be provided so as to correspond to the pair 1 and shared by the two left and right slot machines 1 and 1.

  The medal lending machine 100 is installed corresponding to a side position on a predetermined side of the slot machine 1 (right side toward the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment), and is used for bills or general players who are not registered as members. In a gaming machine, a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a game card, and a membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a member player registered as a member in the game hall, are received. A process for lending medal M, which is a disk-shaped game medium used for a game, and for receiving a medal M acquired by a game in a slot machine 1 and counting the received medal M A process and a process for making it possible to specify the counted number of acquired medals from a visitor card or a membership card are performed.

  The medal lending machine 100 is a card management computer 500 that manages the visitor card and the membership card used in the medal lending machine 100, the medal lending machine 100, and the medal that manages the number of stored medals and the number of medals. Various computers, such as a management computer 550 and a hall computer 540 for managing game information such as table data of each slot machine 1 installed in the game hall, are connected, and bidirectional data is transmitted between these computers. Communication is possible.

  The visitor card and membership card used in the present embodiment have a non-volatile memory for storing various data, rewrite and read out of the recorded information, and non-contact with an external reader / writer device. An IC card having an IC chip having a control unit that performs communication is used. The visitor card and the membership card include a card ID that can identify each card, specifically, a visitor card. The card ID that starts with VC is stored in advance in the member card, and the member card ID that starts with KC is stored in a non-rewritable manner, the type of which can be identified from the card ID, and the prepaid that can specify the prepaid balance Various data such as remaining amount data is stored.

  The member card is issued to a member player who has registered as a member in the amusement hall, and a member ID assigned to the member is stored in a non-rewritable manner. In addition, the member player can use the member card to make a medal M that has been once acquired and counted, and a stored medal that can be used again in the game after the next day. The number of saving medals, which is data of the saving medal, is not directly recorded, and these saving medals are associated with the card ID and the member ID in the medal management computer 550 that manages the information of the saving medals. By being stored, the card ID and the member ID are specified.

  Similarly to the saving medal, the medal management computer 550 also stores the card ID, the member ID, and the medal information in association with each other, so that the card ID and the member ID are stored. The number of medals can be specified from. In addition to these membership medals, not only the membership card but also the visitor card, the medal management computer 550 stores information on the possession medal in association with the card ID. This information is not recorded. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to store information on medals in a visitor card so that it can be compared with information on medals in the medal management computer 550.

  The visitor card is purchased and issued by a card issuing / depositing machine (not shown) installed in the amusement hall and also issued by the medal lending machine 100.

  Next, the medal lending machine 100 of this Embodiment is demonstrated based on FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the medal lending machine 100 according to the present embodiment can open and close a housing 101 that has a vertically long rectangular front view and a front lower opening of the housing 101. And an opening / closing plate 102, and various devices to be described later are incorporated therein.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a bill insertion slot 110 for inserting bills is provided at the upper front of the opening / closing plate 102, and a liquid crystal display 123 with a touch panel 124 is provided at a lower position thereof. In the liquid crystal display 123 with the touch panel 124, various operations on the medal lending machine 100 are accepted, and information associated with these operations and information such as the prepaid balance, the number of medals, and the number of stored medals are displayed. . At a lower position of the liquid crystal display 123 with the touch panel 124, a state notification lamp 111 configured by a full color LED and lit in a plurality of colors so that the state of the medal lending machine 100 can be notified, a membership card, A card insertion slot 112 for inserting a visitor card is provided.

  Below the status notification lamp 111, a deposit enabling lamp 113 for notifying that the deposit is available, a return button 114 for discharging the inserted membership card or visitor card, and a card for displaying a card balance, an error code, and the like. Status of balance display section 115, medal lending button 116 for paying out medals M, medal lending lamp 117 for displaying that medals M can be lent, and a lending medal storage section 183 (see FIG. 3) described later When the member card is accepted, the savings specified by the member card ID and the member ID recorded on the member card when the member card is received. A replay button 121 for executing a replay game using the number of medals and a replay game A personal identification number display unit 119 for displaying a personal identification number to be input, a face image photographing camera 188 (player imaging means) capable of photographing a facial image of a player playing a game in the corresponding slot machine 1, a medal A counting button 122 for manually starting the counting of M is provided.

  Below these various operation units, a medal replenishment door 130 for opening a part of the opening / closing plate 102 when replenishing the medal M to the lending medal storage unit 183 is provided so as to be openable and closable with the lower side as a rotation axis. It has been. The medal supply door 130 cannot be opened unless a predetermined key (not shown) carried by a shop clerk or the like is inserted into the medal supply door key 131.

  A receiving unit 140 for receiving and counting the medals M acquired by the player through the game is provided at a position below the medal supply door 130, and a receiving unit 140 is provided from the lower part of the receiving unit 140. An introduction path cover 141 that constitutes an introduction path for guiding the received medal M downward and introducing it into the introduction port 142 of the counting device 190 described later is extended downward.

  Further, a nozzle 150 that is an example of a guide member that guides the medal M paid out from the payout device 182 to the lower plate 5 of the slot machine 1 slightly below the center position in the vertical direction of the introduction path cover 141. The insertion path cover 141 is inserted in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, at the upper position in the medal lending machine 100, the banknote insertion slot 110 is connected to the banknote insertion slot 110. And a banknote recognition unit 180 for outputting the identification result to the control unit 181 is provided. In the banknote identification unit 180, various banknotes (10,000 yen, 5,000 yen, 2,000 yen, 1,000 yen each) are provided. (Banknotes) can be accepted.

  At the lower position of the bill recognition unit 180, an internal card reader / writer (not shown) built in a position corresponding to the card insertion slot 112 and the medal lending machine so that it can be easily connected to each part constituting the medal lending machine 100. A control unit 181 for controlling the operation of 100, a control unit 181 in which a card stock section (not shown) for storing the collected visitor cards and the like are integrally assembled are arranged. The control unit 181 is provided so that it can be pulled forward by opening the medal replenishment door 130 and can be pulled out from the housing 101 to perform maintenance and the like.

  The internal card reader / writer 187 reads out recorded information such as a (member) card ID, a member ID (member card only), prepaid balance data, and the like recorded in the member card and visitor card inserted from the card insertion slot 112. Has a card stock part (not shown) that stores visitor cards (including recovered cards) used for issuance and can issue cards stored in the card stock part (not shown) It is said that.

  At a position below the control unit 181, that is, at a substantially central position in the vertical direction of the housing 101, a rental medal storage unit 183 that stores the payout medal M is provided. The lending medal storage unit 183 is formed above the medal hopper 183a and a medal hopper 183a that opens upward and is provided above the payout device 182 that pays out the medal M stored in the lending medal storage unit 183. The medal M stored in the lending medal storage unit 183 is aligned and guided toward the payout device 182 by the medal hopper 183a, and then a rotating disk (not illustrated) provided therein is illustrated. The medals are discharged from the medal discharge port 182a formed on the front surface and are discharged to the lower plate 5 through the nozzle 150.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a medal replenishment door 130 is disposed above the medal hopper 183 a, and the medal M can be replenished to the lending medal storage unit 183 by opening the medal replenishment door 130. ing. In the present embodiment, the medal replenishment door 130 is opened so that the medal M can be replenished to the lending medal storage unit 183. However, a medal replenishment device (not shown) provided on a gaming machine installation island (not shown). ), The medal M may be automatically replenished.

  A counting device 190 for counting the number of introduced medals M is disposed below the payout device 182. As shown in FIG. 10, the counting device 190 is formed with a counting port 191 that opens on the upper surface, and the medal M received from the counting port 191 slides along the introduction inclined portion 191a. M is put into the rotating disk 190g, and the medals M discharged one by one from the rotating disk 190g are aligned and flow down along the counting inclined portion 191b. A photo sensor 190e for detecting the presence of the medal M is provided in the middle of the flow path of the medal M, and a medal for capturing an image of the medal M at the moment when the end of the medal M is detected by the photo sensor 190e. A photographing camera 190c (game medium imaging means) is provided.

  Then, the controller 190a (appropriate determination means) of the counting device 190 instantaneously determines the authenticity of the medal M (whether it is a regular medal or an illegal medal) based on the medal image photographed by the medal photographing camera 190c, and based on the result of the judgment. A certain medal determination information is transmitted to the control unit 181 and the flow path of the medal M is switched by the flow path switching unit 190d, and the regular medal M is counted as the regular medal M and flows toward the discharge port 192. M is counted as an illegal medal and flows toward the medal storage box 194 set in the counting device 190. As described above, the illegal medals are not discharged from the discharge port 192 after being counted, but are stored in the medal storage box 194, thereby preventing unauthorized medals from being recycled and reused. Has been. Thus, the medal M introduced into the counting device 190 is determined for authenticity and counted. Further, the medal M discharged from the discharge port 192 is discharged into a gaming machine installation island (not shown) through an opening formed in the lower surface of the housing 101, and a collecting device (not shown) provided in the gaming machine installation island. ) To be collected.

  As will be described later, when a predetermined number (for example, 100) of illegal medals are stored in the medal storage box 194, a predetermined error signal is output to the island controller on the gaming machine installation island, the hall computer 540, or the like. Thus, error notification is performed, and illegal medals can be collected as needed without the need for periodic check by a game clerk or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when a predetermined amount of illegal medals M are stored in the medal storage box 194 at the end of business, it is possible to notify the store clerk to that effect. ing.

  In addition, the illegal medals (inappropriate game media) in the present embodiment are not only medals brought from outside such as other stores (fake medals (second improper game media)) but also a predetermined area in the own store. The medals used in other areas are also included in the illegal medals.

  For example, a game is performed using a first area where a slot machine for playing using a first medal worth 5 yen per piece is installed and a second medal worth 20 yen per piece. For example, when a first medal is brought in and used in the second area, the second area where the slot machine is installed is borrowed in the first area where the lending rate is low. By using the first medal in the second area where the lending rate is high, the player can gain profits illegally. In such a case, the first medal becomes an illegal medal in the second area.

  Further, when registering the identification information of medals that are normally used in the counting device 190, about 100 regular medals are inserted into the counting device 190 in the predetermined medal registration mode, and the medal photographing camera 190c is loaded. The image information of the regular medal is registered in the memory 190b (see FIG. 19). The counting device 190 determines authenticity by comparing the image of the regular medal stored in the memory 190b with the image of the medal to be determined. Similarly, when registering the amusement island medal (own store medal) in the other area of the own store, about 100 pieces of own store medals are put in the counting device 190 in advance, and the image of the own store medal is displayed. It is registered in the memory 190b.

  In addition, by registering medals corresponding to each of the plurality of game areas in the own store in this way, for example, in the game hall, the medals corresponding to the first game area and the second game area in accordance with the model change or the like. Each time you change the model, you do not need to register a medal that corresponds to the game area every time you exchange a corresponding medal. Has no trouble registering medals.

  The transition to the predetermined medal registration mode is impossible from the outside of the medal lending machine 100, and the counting device 190 housed in the medal lending machine 100 is taken out and a predetermined operation is performed. The player or the like illegally shifts to the medal registration mode and cannot change the registration.

  In addition, the image information of the regular medal or the own store medal registered in the counting device 190 of one medal lending machine 100 is transmitted to the medal management computer 550, and the image information is sent to the other plurals via the medal management computer 550. By transmitting to the medal lending machine 100, the counting device 190 of each medal lending machine 100 may register the image information of the regular medal or the own store medal. In this way, particularly when a large number of medal lending machines 100 are installed, it is possible to easily register image information of regular medals or own store medals. Furthermore, in the medal management computer 550, the setting of the regular medal and the own store medal can be changed as appropriate (game medium type setting means).

  It should be noted that the controller 190a of the counting device 190 is based on decorations, characters, and the like applied to the surface of the medal when comparing the image of the regular medal stored in the memory 190b with the image of the medal to be determined. Various features are extracted, and the similarity is calculated based on the matching status of the extracted various feature amounts. Based on these various facial feature quantities, a difference sum, an average ratio, or a ratio sum is obtained as the similarity. If the similarity value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, it is determined as a regular medal.

  In addition, the controller 190a (game medium type setting means) of the counting device 190 compares the medal image determined as an illegal medal with the image of the own store medal stored in the memory 190b. . Also in the determination of whether or not it is the own store medal, similar to the determination of the regular medal, the similarity is calculated based on the coincidence state of various feature amounts, and the comparison is performed. The various features described above also include information such as the diameter of the medal, so that medals of different sizes (for example, φ25 medal and φ30 medal) can be compared and identified.

  The front side of the counting port 191 is provided with an introduction member 193 having an upward U-shape when viewed from the front. The medal M received and dropped by the receiving unit 140 is introduced into the counting port 191 as will be described later.

  A power supply unit 198 for supplying power to various devices provided in the housing 101 is provided on the back surface of the control unit 181 in the housing 101 so as to protrude from the back surface of the housing 101. .

  As shown in FIG. 2, when a player plays a game in the slot machine 1, 1000 yen medals M (for example, 50) are ejected from the payout device 182 by inserting the banknote into the banknote insertion slot 110. Since it is paid out to the lower tray 5 of the slot machine 1 through the nozzle 150, a game can be played using this. Also, if a high-value bill (2000 yen, 5000 yen, 10000 yen) is inserted, if there is no visitor card being accepted, a medal M worth 1000 yen will be paid out, and the remaining amount will be a newly issued visitor card If there is a visitor card or membership card being recorded, the acceptance amount is added to the remaining amount of the visitor card or membership card being accepted and updated. Also, if the visitor card or membership card being accepted has a card balance of 1000 yen or more, 1000 yen medals M (for example, 50) are paid out from the payout device 182 by pressing the lending button 116. The remaining amount is subtracted and updated. Also, if there are more than a predetermined number of medals or saving medals on the member card or visitor card being accepted, 1000 yen can be obtained by pressing the replay button 121 on the condition that the authentication with the password is OK. Minute medals M (for example, 50) are paid out from the payout device 182, and the number of medals or the number of stored medals is subtracted and updated.

  Further, when the player has won the medal M in the game, the received medal M that has been paid out to the lower plate 5 is manually inserted into the receiving unit 140, and the received medal M has dropped in the introduction path cover 141. After that, it is introduced into a counting port 191 which is an introduction part of the counting device 190. The medal M introduced into the counting device 190 is detected by a medal detection sensor (not shown) provided in the counting device 190, and the rotating disk is detected based on the detection of the medal M by the medal detection sensor. The number of medals introduced by driving (not shown) is counted, and the counted number of medals is updated by adding to the number of medals specified from the member card or visitor card being accepted. M is discharged from the discharge port 192 into the gaming machine installation island (not shown).

  In the present embodiment, counting is started based on the detection of a medal M by a medal detection sensor (not shown) provided in the counting device 190. A counting button or the like that can be operated by the player may be provided, and counting may be started when the counting button is operated.

  When the player finishes the game, the player operates the return button 114 to return the member card or the visitor card that is being accepted (including the visitor card issued by inserting the cash). If there is a medal number (the number of medals) that has been obtained and counted in the game, a medal management computer 550 sends a medal count update request including the card ID and the number of medals to be returned to the member card or visitor card. The number of medals included in the medal count update request is updated by adding to the number of medals corresponding to the card ID of the member card or visitor card. It is possible to specify the number of medals from, and exchange it for a prize corresponding to the number of medals, or use it for another game. Further, when there is a prepaid balance, the prepaid balance can be settled by the settlement device 580 or the like installed in the game hall.

  As described above, in the medal lending machine 100 according to the present embodiment, not only the medal M is lent when the game is started in the corresponding slot machine 1, but also the settlement is executed at the end of the game. Therefore, the player can start and settle the game without moving from the slot machine 1.

  Next, based on FIGS. 4-14, the detailed structure of the various members provided in the opening-and-closing board 102 is demonstrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the opening / closing plate 102 is formed in a backward U shape in plan view from a front plate 102 a and bent pieces 102 b bent from the left and right sides of the front plate 102 a to the rear side. When the opening formed in the lower front portion of the housing 101 is closed, the left and right bent pieces 102b are fitted inside the front ends of the left and right side plates of the housing 101. Further, in the present embodiment, the locking grooves 103 provided at the top and bottom of the bent piece 102b are locked to the locking pins 104 provided on the inner surface of the side plate of the housing 101 so as to be attached to the closed position. .

  An opening / closing plate key 106 is provided at the upper end of the opening / closing plate 102, and the opening / closing plate 102 is detachably attached to the front side of the medal lending machine 100 by being locked by the opening / closing plate key 106. The opening / closing plate 102 cannot be removed unless a predetermined key (not shown) carried by a store clerk or the like of the game hall is inserted into the opening / closing plate key 106.

  The opening / closing plate 102 is configured to be able to cover the front side of the lending medal storage unit 183 and the counting device 190, that is, the lower side of the medal supply door 130 in the front opening of the housing 101, and the upper side thereof is a banknote identification. A part of the front surface of the medal lending machine 100 is constituted by the front surfaces of the unit 180 and the control unit 181.

  At the height position corresponding to the introduction member 193 on the opening / closing plate 102, a horizontally long introduction port 142 is formed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. Further, a rear insertion hole 143b having a horizontally long rectangular shape and a size through which the nozzle 150 can be inserted is formed above the introduction port 142. In addition, a long hole 105a is formed at the vertical position on the left and right side of the back surface, and a locking tube 105 having a vertically long rectangular shape is projected from the back surface of the long hole 105a.

  The introduction path cover 141 is inclined to the rear side downward from the lower end of the front plate 141a, the front plate 141a having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, the side plate 141b bent from the left and right sides of the front plate 141a to the back side. An inclined plate 141c (second bottom surface portion) and an inclined plate 141d inclined downward from the lower ends of the left and right side plates 141b downward are formed in a vertically long box shape whose back and upper surfaces are open, and from the inlet 142 It is extended upwards. The lower part is formed so as to be gradually inclined toward the center of the back surface toward the introduction port 142. In the present embodiment, the inner surfaces of the left and right side plates 141b constitute two opposing side wall surfaces among the wall surfaces forming the inside of the introduction path.

  In addition, an inclined plate 141c '(first bottom surface portion) is provided above the inclined plate 141c so as to overlap with the inclined plate 141c with a predetermined distance. The bottom of the introduction path cover 141 is formed by these two inclined plates 141c and 141c '. The upper inclined plate 141c 'extends toward the counting device 190 from the lower inclined plate 141c. As will be described later, a plurality of small-diameter punching holes 148, 148 '(through holes) penetrated by punching are formed in the inclined plates 141c, 141c'. Each punching hole 148, 148 'has a diameter smaller than the diameter 2R of the medal M.

  Outward locking claws 144 project from a position corresponding to the long hole 105a at the rear end of the side plate 141b. By inserting these locking claws 144 from the front side of the long hole 105a, a locking cylinder is formed. The introduction path cover 141 is attached to the front surface of the opening / closing plate 102. In the mounted state, the rear end of the inclined plate 141 c ′ is inserted through the introduction port 142 and protrudes to the back side, and is arranged so that the rear end overlaps above the introduction member 193. Since the locking claw 144 is locked on the back surface of the opening / closing plate 102 in this way, the introduction path cover 141 cannot be removed from the opening / closing plate 102 unless the opening / closing plate 102 is opened. Thus, unauthorized access to the counting device 190 from the introduction port 142 is prevented.

  In this way, the introduction path cover 141 is attached to the front surface of the opening / closing plate 102, whereby the rear opening of the introduction path cover 141 is closed by the opening / closing plate 102, and the medal M received by the receiving unit 140 is introduced into the counting device 190. An introduction path K for the medal M extending in the vertical direction to be introduced into the mouth 142 is configured.

  Further, a front insertion hole 143a having substantially the same shape as the rear insertion hole 143b is formed at a position slightly below the position corresponding to the rear insertion hole 143b in the front plate 141a, and the nozzle 150 can be inserted therethrough. The front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b for inserting the nozzle 150 are formed on one end side (for example, the right side) of the introduction path K in the left-right width direction, and only on the other end (left end) side of the nozzle 150. A narrow path K1 is formed.

  On the upper left and right sides of the protective member 145, columnar rod members 146a and 146b are provided in the front-rear direction, that is, substantially parallel to the side plate 141b, and at an upper position between the rod members 146a and 146b, The rod-shaped member 146c is provided in the front-rear direction, that is, substantially parallel to the side plate 141b. These rod-shaped members 146a to 146c are arranged at positions farther from the side plate 141b than the diameter 2R of the medal M, so that the medal M is not clogged between the rod-shaped members 146a to 146c and the side plate 141b. And by sticking such rod-shaped members 146a to 146c in the front-rear direction, the posture of the dropped medal M is aligned to the lateral posture in which the front and back surfaces face the side plate 141b.

  The nozzle 150 extends from the front surface of the payout device 182 through the rear insertion hole 143b and the front insertion hole 143a, and is connected to the base 151 so as to protrude from the front insertion hole 143a toward the player side. The base 151 is formed so as not to be deformable, and the protrusion 152 is formed so as to be deformable at least toward the slot machine 1 with respect to the base 151.

  Specifically, the base 151 is formed in a rectangular tube shape, and is fixed to the back surface of the opening / closing plate 102 with screws (not shown) or the like so as to be inclined downward from the medal discharge port 182a. . In the attached state, the rear end opening is disposed so as to cover the medal discharge port 182a, and the front end protrudes forward through the rear insertion hole 143b and the front insertion hole 143a.

  The projecting portion 152 is formed by connecting a plurality of eaves members 152 a having an upward U-shape so as to be pivotable in the vertical and horizontal directions by universal joints (universal joints), and the rear eave member 152 a is connected to the front end of the base 151. It is connected by a universal joint (universal joint) so as to be rotatable in the vertical and horizontal directions. That is, the base 151 is fixed in a state of extending in the longitudinal direction of the introduction path cover 141, that is, in the front-rear direction intersecting with the movement (falling) direction of the medal M, whereas the base 151 The projecting portion 152 connected to the tip of 151 can be rotated (deformed) in the left-right direction (see FIG. 2) and the up-down direction (see FIG. 3).

  As described above, the base 151 inserted through the introduction path cover 141 is not deformable, so that the fall of the medal M is not hindered, and the protrusion 152 can be deformed to the slot machine 1 side. Since the issued medal M can be directly guided to the slot machine 1, the usability is improved.

  As shown in FIG. The medal M inserted into the opening 140a of the receiving unit 140 is guided into the introduction path cover 141 by the receiving unit 140, and falls downward in the introduction path K including the introduction path cover 141 and the opening / closing plate 102. . In the middle of dropping, the medal M collides with the rod-shaped members 146a to 146c facing in the front-rear direction, so that the posture of the medal M is changed to a lateral posture in which the front and back surfaces face the left and right side plates 141b.

  As shown in FIG. 8, a protective member 145 that guides the medal M falling from above to the left side of the nozzle 150 so as not to collide with the nozzle 150 at a position above the front insertion hole 143 a. Is provided. The protection member 145 has a guide inclined surface 145 b that is inclined downward from the right side to the left side, and is formed so as to surround the nozzle 150. Thus, the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b for inserting the nozzle 150 in the front-rear direction are formed so as to be biased toward one end side in the left-right width direction (right side in the present embodiment). The narrow path K1 formed so as to avoid the nozzle 150 may be formed on the right side instead of the left side.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the base 151 of the nozzle 150 protruded ahead rather than the front insertion hole 143a, the protrusion part 152 was rotatably connected in the front position rather than this front insertion hole 143a. In the introduction path K, the base 151 may be rotatably connected. In this case, it is necessary to enlarge the front insertion hole 143a so that the movement of the protrusion 152A can be allowed. However, since the medal M may flow out from the gap, the protection member 145 surrounds the nozzle 150. Good.

  In addition, by surrounding the periphery of the nozzle 150 in a cylindrical shape with the protection member 145 in this way, the medal M does not enter the protection member 145, so that the protrusion 152 A of the nozzle 150 is connected to the base 151. Even if it is provided so as to be rotatable, the drop of the medal M is not adversely affected.

  Next, the receiving unit 140 that receives the medal M inserted by the player will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 4, the receiving portion 140 is provided at the upper end of the introduction path cover 141 so as to open upward. As shown in FIG. 9A, the receiving unit 140 includes a front plate 141a that constitutes the introduction path cover 141 described above, a side plate 141b provided on the side of the front plate 141a, and an introduction path cover 141. And an opening / closing plate 102 to be attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 9A, the height positions of the upper end edges of the left and right side plates 141b are different from each other, and the left and right side plates 141b are provided with a height difference of the vertical dimension V. Further, of the left and right side plates 141b, the left side plate 141b, that is, one side plate 141b provided on the slot machine 1 side corresponding to the medal lending machine 100 is formed higher than the other side plate 141b provided on the right side. ing. The upper end edge of the left side plate 141b is curved and formed so as to bulge upward, and the upper end edge of the right side plate 141b is formed so as to be recessed downward.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the receiving unit 140 can be opened and closed in an open state in which the medal M can be received and in a closed state in which the medal M cannot be received. A lid member 160 (lid body) is provided. The lid member 160 includes a lid plate 160a (main lid portion) having a substantially plate shape that closes the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140, and lid member side plates 160b (lid portions) provided on the left and right sides of the lid plate 160a. Side wall). Note that the left and right lid member side plates 160b of the lid member 160 are disposed so as to overlap and contact the inner sides of the left and right side plates 141b of the receiving portion 140 (see the sectional view of FIG. 12). In the present embodiment, the opening formed at the upper end of the introduction path cover 141 is the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140.

  The left and right lid member side plates 160b of the lid member 160 have pivots 161 pivotally supported by pivot shaft holes 149 provided on the front side of the left and right side plates 141b in the introduction path cover 141. A lid member 160 is attached to be pivotable in the front-rear direction with the pivot 161 as an axis. The lid member 160 is rotated about the pivot 161 as an axis, thereby opening the receiving portion 140 (see FIGS. 9A, 11A, and 12A). It can be displaced at the closed position for closing the receiving portion 140 (see FIGS. 9B, 11B, and 12B). The lid member 160 is maintained at a predetermined opening angle when the front side of the lid plate 160a is brought into contact with the upper end edge of the front plate 141a of the introduction path cover 141 in the open position. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, the height positions of the upper edge of the left and right lid member side plates 160b of the lid member 160 in the opened state are different from each other, and the left and right side plates 141b of the introduction path cover 141 are different from each other. Similarly to the above, a vertical difference in height is provided. Further, like the left and right side plates 141b of the introduction path cover 141 described above, of the left and right lid member side plates 160b, the left lid member side plate 160b, that is, one lid member side plate 160b provided on the slot machine 1 side is It is formed higher than the other lid member side plate 160b provided on the lid. The upper end edge of the left lid member side plate 160b is curved and formed so as to bulge upward, and the upper end edge of the right lid member side plate 160b is curved and formed so as to be recessed downward. Yes. As will be described later, the lower end edge of the right lid member side plate 160b is curved and formed so as to be recessed.

  The curved shape of the upper edge of the right side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141 and the curved shape of the upper edge of the right side lid member side plate 160b of the lid member 160 are substantially the same, and the lid member 160 is open. In the right side plates 141b and 160b of the receiving part 140, a large dent is formed. This dent is the position of the joint between the right side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141 and the right side lid member side plate 160b of the lid member 160 (the position where the side plate 141b and the lid member side plate 160b overlap in FIG. 9A). In the curved shape in which the upper end edge of the right side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141 and the upper end edge of the right side lid member side plate 160b of the lid member 160 are continuous in a state where the lid member 160 is open. It is formed. That is, in the right side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141, the distance from the pivot hole 149 to the upper end edge of the joint position of the side plate 141b, and in the right lid member side plate 160b of the lid member 160, from the pivot 161 to the lid member side plate 160b. The distance to the upper edge of the position of the seam is substantially the same distance.

  For example, when the player places the medal M paid out to the lower plate 5 of the slot machine 1 into the receiving unit 140 on the right side, the player performs an operation of grasping and inserting the medal M with the right hand. . At that time, in the opened state of the lid member 160, a curved large dent is formed on the right side of the receiving unit 140, that is, on the side plates 141b and 160b on the opposite side of the slot machine 1, so that the player can receive the medal M. When holding and inserting the medal M from the receiving unit 140, the little finger side of the hand holding the medal M is not easily obstructed by the right side plates 141b and 160b, so that the medal M can be inserted smoothly. Further, since the left side of the receiving unit 140, that is, the side plates 141b and 160b on the slot machine 1 side are formed higher, the inserted medal M hits the left side plates 141b and 160b formed higher and receives the receiving unit 140. The medal M is prevented from being scattered.

  That is, when the player grabs and inserts the medal M with his right hand, the right hand moves from the right side to the left side of the receiving portion 140 around the player's shoulders and elbows. By forming a large curved dent in the right side plates 141b and 160b of the receiving part 140, the medal M is prevented from being caught on the side plates 141b and 160b and spilling to the right side of the receiving part 140, and the receiving part 140 is received. Even if the medal M separated from the right hand moving from the right side to the left side is about to spill down to the left side of the receiving part 140, the inside of the receiving part 140 is blocked by the left side plates 141b and 160b formed high. Therefore, the medals M are prevented from being scattered.

  In the present embodiment, the left side plates 141b and 160b are formed high, and the right side plates 141b and 160b are formed with large curved dents. Of the upper edges of the left side plates 141b and 160b, The height difference from the highest part to the lowest part of the upper edge of the right side plates 141b and 160b is about 4 cm. This is because if the average left-right width dimension of the palm of the player's person is about 8 cm, the thumb side rises when the medal M is inserted into the receiving unit 140 with the medal M held in the palm. Is assumed to be slightly inclined (inclination angle of about 30 °), the difference in height between the thumb side and the little finger side in the hand is about 4 cm. Therefore, by setting the height difference from the highest part of the upper edge of the left side plates 141b and 160b to the lowest part of the upper edge of the right side plates 141b and 160b, the medal M becomes the thumb of the hand. It will not spill from the side.

  In the present embodiment, when the lid member 160 is in the open state, a large curved dent is formed in the right side plates 141b and 160b of the receiving portion 140. The shape of this dent is a curved shape. Not limited to this, the right side plates 141b and 160b of the receiving portion 140 may be formed as large recesses cut out in a substantially V shape, or may be formed as rectangular recesses.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 11 (b), in the right lid member side plate 160b, when the lid member 160 is in a closed state, a portion (upper edge) of the right lid member side plate 160b ( The lower end edge of the right lid member side plate 160b in the opened state is formed so as to be recessed. The curved shape of the upper edge of the right side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141 and the curved shape of the upper edge of the right side lid member side plate 160b of the lid member 160 are substantially the same, and when closed The both side plates 141b and 160b overlap each other so that the upper end edge of the lid member side plate 160b and the upper end edge of the right side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141 are substantially flush with each other. That is, the lid member side plate 160 b on the right side of the lid member 160 is overlapped with and covered with the side plate 141 b on the right side of the introduction path cover 141.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, when the lid member 160 is closed, the lid member side plate 160b on the left side of the lid member 160 is overlapped with and covered with the side plate 141b on the left side of the introduction path cover 141. It is like that. Therefore, when the lid member 160 is in the closed state, the left and right lid member side plates 160b cannot be touched from the outside by the left and right side plates 141b of the introduction path cover 141, so that a player or the like can remove the lid member side plate 160b of the lid member 160. It becomes impossible to pick and it is possible to prevent the lid member 160 from being opened by the unauthorized operation of the lid member side plate 160b without using a screw 107 as a maintenance means described later. In the present embodiment, it may not be possible to completely prevent the lid member 160 from being opened, and at least it is difficult to open the lid member 160, or it takes time to open the lid member 160. It may be difficult to open.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12, female screw holes 162 into which screws 107 are screwed are provided in two front and rear sides on the side surface of the left lid member side plate 160b of the lid member 160. Further, the left side plate 141b of the receiving portion 140 is formed with two screw insertion holes 108a and 108b through which the screw 107 is inserted. The respective screw insertion holes 108a and 108b are used in the open state and the closed state of the lid member 160. When the lid member 160 is in the open state, the female screw hole 162 of the lid member side plate 160b is disposed corresponding to one screw insertion hole 108a provided at the front position, and the screw 107 causes the lid member side plate 160b to be connected to the side plate 141b. By fixing the cover member 160, the open state of the lid member 160 is maintained (see FIG. 12A). The screw 107, the screw insertion holes 108a and 108b through which the screw 107 is inserted, and the female screw hole 162 into which the screw 107 is screwed together constitute the maintaining means in the present embodiment.

  When the lid member 160 is in the closed state, the female screw hole 162 of the lid member side plate 160b is disposed corresponding to the other screw insertion hole 108b provided at the rear position, and the screw 107 is used to connect the lid member side plate 160b to the side plate. By fixing with respect to 141b, the closed state of the lid member 160 is maintained (see FIG. 12B). That is, the male screw portion of the screw 107 and the female screw hole 162 of the lid member side plate 160b constitute the fixing means in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 6, in a state where the lid member 160 of the receiving portion 140 is opened, a front opening 140 a that can receive the medal M is formed in a dish shape that opens upward, and the inside of the introduction path cover 141 Communication is made toward the introduction route K. The front opening 140a, which is the upper surface opening, is formed in a substantially square shape in plan view, and is formed to expand forward from the introduction path cover 141. That is, the front opening 140a is longer in the front-rear width dimension L12 including the lid member 160 and the receiving portion 140 than in the front-rear width dimension L10 of the introduction path cover 141 (see FIG. 6, L10 <L12). The frontage 140a is closer to the player side with respect to the upper surface opening of the introduction path cover 141, so that the medal M can be easily inserted. The vertical width L13 including the lid member 160 and the receiving portion 140 is shorter than the front-rear width L10 of the introduction path cover 141 (see FIG. 6, L10> L13).

  As shown in FIG. 14, when installing in a game arcade, the slot machine 1 and the medal lending machine 100 are alternately arranged in the left-right direction. As described above, the medal lending machine 100 is provided on the right side of the corresponding slot machine 1, and the medal lending machine 100 and the slot machine 1 disposed on the other right side are separated by a predetermined distance. A predetermined spacer member 10 is provided.

  Further, as described above, by closing the lid member 160, the lid member 160 does not protrude forward from the introduction path cover 141, so that the slot machine 1 disposed on the right side of the medal lending machine 100 When the front door 1b is opened to the left, the front door 1b comes into contact with the protruding end of the lid member 160, and the lid member 160 is prevented from being damaged or obstructing the opening of the front door 1b. The front door 1b of the slot machine 1 cannot be opened unless a predetermined key (not shown) carried by an operator such as a game shop clerk is inserted into the front door key 1c (see FIG. 2). .

  In the medal lending machine 100 corresponding to the slot machine 1 with the front door 1b closed, the gap S between the left side plate 141b and the front door 1b in the receiving part 140 is narrow, and the above-described lid member An operator cannot access a tool such as the driver D with respect to the screw head (operation unit) of the screw 107 as a maintenance unit and a fixing unit that maintain the open or closed state of 160. Further, in the medal lending machine 100 corresponding to the slot machine 1 with the front door 1b opened, a tool such as the driver D can be accessed with respect to the screw head of the screw 107 of the left side plate 141b in the receiving part 140. .

  Thus, in the medal lending machine 100 corresponding to the slot machine 1 with the front door 1b closed, even if the player attempts to open and close the lid member 160 using a tool such as the driver D, the left side plate 141b Since the gap S with the front door 1b is narrow, unauthorized opening and closing operations are prevented. Also, an operator such as a game shop clerk who can open the front door 1b of the slot machine 1 opens a front door 1b to allow a tool such as a driver D to access the left side plate 141b. The screw 107 that fixes the lid member side plate 160b to the side plate 141b can be operated, and the lid member 160 can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the screw 107 as a maintaining means for maintaining the lid member 160 in an open state or a closed state is provided by a tool such as a driver D from the left side of the receiving portion 140, that is, the side where the slot machine 1 is disposed. It is possible to operate, and it is difficult to release the maintenance state of the lid member 160 by the screw 107 from the front side (player side) of the receiving unit 140. Therefore, it can be difficult for the player or the like to intentionally release the closed state of the lid member 160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 9A, there are other parts in the opening / closing plate 102 in the vicinity of the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 and the inner surface side (upper side in the open state) of the lid member 160. In the introduction path cover 141, which is a part of the receiving path 140, the outer peripheral surface (peripheral part) in the vicinity of the opening 140 ′ and the color of the opening / closing plate 102 in the vicinity of the receiving part 140 (peripheral part) are colored higher in color. Further, high brightness portions 109 and 109 'are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the outer peripheral surface (peripheral portion) near the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 in the introduction path cover 141 and the vicinity portion (peripheral portion) of the receiving portion 140 in the opening / closing plate 102 are colored in black. In addition, the high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ are colored in a color with high brightness such as white or gray. By providing the high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ in this way, even if the lighting in the game shop where the slot machine 1 is installed is dark, the player can receive the medal M by relying on the high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′. Can be put in.

  In the present embodiment, the high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ are colored white or gray. However, the color of the high brightness portions is not limited to white or gray, and the other in the introduction path cover 141 and the opening / closing plate 102. Other colors may be used as long as the brightness is higher than the color of the part, or a fluorescent color that is easy to visually recognize may be used even when the illumination is dark.

  A light emitting unit 165 that emits light when the counting device 190 counts the medal M is located at a position corresponding to the opening 140 a of the receiving unit 140 in the opening / closing plate 102, that is, the entrance side of the opening 140 ′ of the receiving unit 140. Is provided. The light emitting unit 165 is exposed to the front side from a horizontally long rectangular opening provided in the opening / closing plate 102. As shown in FIG. 5, an LED unit 190f that emits light when the medal M is counted is provided at the front of the counting device 190, and the LED unit 190f of the counting device 190 is provided on the back side of the opening / closing plate 102. A light receiving unit 168 that receives light emission is provided. The light receiving unit 168 is connected to a decorative optical fiber 167 that guides the introduced light to the light emitting unit 165, and the optical fiber 167 extends upward along the back surface of the opening / closing plate 102 to emit the light emitting unit. 165.

  By providing the light emitting unit 165 in this manner, it is possible to notify the player that the medal M is counted by the counting device 190. In addition, it is possible to notify surrounding players by light emission that the medal M has been paid out in the corresponding slot machine 1, so that it is possible to enhance the production effect and collect the gaze of the surrounding players. Thus, it is possible to prevent an illegal medal (a rooster medal) or the like from being inserted into the receiving unit 140.

  Further, the LED unit 190f is provided in the counting device 190, and the light emission of the LED unit 190f is guided to the light emitting unit 165 by the optical fiber 167 to the light emitting unit 165, so that the wiring between the counting device 190 and the opening / closing plate 102 is unnecessary. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the attaching / detaching operation of the opening / closing plate 102 is facilitated as compared with the case where an LED lamp is directly provided in the light emitting portion 165.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the lid member 160 is in a closed state, the light emitting unit 165 is concealed by the lid member 160. The high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ described above are also hidden by the lid member 160. In this way, when the receiving unit 140 is not used, that is, when the counting device 190 is not used, the light emitting unit 165 and the high brightness units 109 and 109 ′ can be protected by the lid member 160, and the light emitting unit 165 and It is possible to prevent the high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ from becoming dirty or attaching dust. Further, the high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ are concealed so that the receiving portion 140 is not conspicuous. In addition, for example, when the lid member 160 is closed when the medal lending machine 100 is moved or installed, other members may hit the light emitting unit 165 during the work and be damaged or pinched. Further, it is possible to prevent the paint or the like constituting the high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ from being wrinkled or soiled and deteriorating in appearance.

  As shown in FIG. 13, on the bottom portion of the introduction path cover 141, as described above, the lower inclined plate 141c (second bottom surface portion) and the upper portion that is overlapped with a predetermined dimension away from the inclined plate 141c. Side inclined plate 141c ′ (first bottom surface portion). As described above, a plurality of small-diameter punching holes 148 and 148 ′ (through holes) are formed in the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′, so that a liquid such as a beverage possessed by the player from the receiving unit 140, etc. Is introduced, the liquid that has reached the bottom of the introduction path cover 141 flows out of the punching holes 148 and 148 ′ of the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ to prevent the liquid from entering the counting device 190. it can.

  The upper inclined plate 141c 'is provided with a punching hole 148' in the front region, and the lower inclined plate 141c is provided with a punching hole 148 in the rear region. The regions where the punching holes 148 and 148 ′ are formed in these inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ do not overlap vertically so that the punching holes 148 and 148 ′ of the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ It is arranged so that it does not overlap vertically (vertical direction). By doing so, even if the player tries to insert a linear member such as a rod-shaped member or a wire from the punching hole 148 of the inclined plate 141c toward the counting device 190, the insertion of these members can be prevented. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the regions where the punching holes 148 and 148 ′ of the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ are formed are provided shifted in the front-rear direction, but the punching holes 148 of the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ are provided. 148 'may be provided by being shifted in the left-right direction, or regions where punching holes 148, 148' of the inclined plates 141c, 141c 'are formed alternately in the front-rear or left-right direction. By doing so, the insertion of the rod-like member or the linear member may be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the punching holes 148 and 148 ′ of the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ are formed. However, the through holes in the first and second bottom surface portions in the present invention are punching holes 148 and 148 ′. It is not limited to this, and may be a slit-like through-hole, or as a substantially plate member in which each inclined plate 141c, 141c ′ is formed in a net-like or grid-like shape, these are through-holes formed in a net-like or grid-like shape. Also good.

  As described above, in the medal lending machine 100 (game device) as the embodiment of the present invention, the opening 140 ′ of the receiving unit 140 is closed by closing the opening 140 ′ of the receiving unit 140. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously inserting the medal M (game medium) or deliberately inserting trash. In addition, when changing from an operation mode using the counting device 190 to an operation mode not using the counting device 190 in the game store, the medal lending machine 100 is replaced only by closing the opening 140 ′ of the receiving unit 140. It is possible to prevent the medal M from being inserted and to prevent the lid member 160 from being easily opened. In the present invention, it may not be possible to completely prevent the lid member 160 from being opened, and at least the lid member 160 is difficult to open, or it takes time to open the lid member 160. What should I do?

  Note that the case of changing from an operation mode using the counting device 190 to an operation mode not using the counting device 190 in a game store means, for example, a business using a medal storage box (so-called dollar box) after the medal lending machine 100 is installed. The case where it changes to a form, the case where a specific medal lending machine 100 breaks down, and use is temporarily stopped etc. can be considered.

  In the present embodiment, in the lid member 160 that closes the receiving portion 140, the lid plate 160a that closes the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 has a substantially plate shape, but the lid plate 160a of the lid member 160 is The present invention is not limited to a substantially plate shape, and any mode may be used as long as it makes the passage of the medal M impossible or difficult. For example, the lid plate 160a may be a member formed in a net shape or a lattice shape.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the lid member 160 is folded so as to be folded into the receiving portion 140, the lid member 160 does not protrude forward from the receiving portion 140 in the open state. In addition, the opening 140a having a substantially funnel shape in the open state can be eliminated in the closed state, and a player may inadvertently insert a medal M (game medium) into the opening 140a, Etc. can be prevented.

  In the above embodiment, the receiving portion 140 is a medal slot opening upward formed by the front plate 141a and the side plate 141b provided so as to protrude to the front side of the opening / closing plate 102. The shape of the receiving portion 140 is not limited to this. For example, like the medal supply door 130 that can be opened and closed with the lower side as the center, the shape of the receiving portion 140 is a funnel shape that is flush with the opening and closing plate 102 in the closed state. The opening / closing lid member is provided so that it can be opened and closed in the front-rear direction with the lower piece of the opening / closing lid member as a center. Good. In this case, the opening formed in the opening / closing plate 102 forms the opening of the receiving portion in the present invention, and the medal passage formed from the opening of the opening / closing plate 102 to the inside of the medal lending machine 100 is in the present invention. Make an introduction route.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lid member 160 is attached to the left and right side plates 141b of the introduction path cover 141 so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction around a rotation axis that faces the left-right direction. It may be attached so that it can turn in the left-right direction around a turning shaft that faces. Furthermore, the movement mode of the lid member 160 may be not only a rotation operation but also a sliding movement of the lid member 160.

  In the embodiment, the lid member 160 is attached to the left and right side plates 141b of the introduction path cover 141 so as to be pivotable in the front-rear direction around the pivot 161, and the lid member 160 is pivoted forward. The opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 is opened and rotated rearward so that the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 is closed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pivot serving as a pivot center of the pivoting operation is provided on the upper side of the lid member 160, and this pivot is pivotally supported above the introduction path cover 141 in the opening / closing plate 102 so that the lid member 160 pivots backward. Thus, the opening 140 ′ of the receiving unit 140 may be opened, and the opening 140 ′ of the receiving unit 140 may be closed by being rotated forward.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lid member 160 is pivotally supported by the introduction path cover 141. However, when the lid member 160 is attached to and detached from the introduction path cover 141, the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 is opened and closed. It may be a configuration.

  In the embodiment, an operator such as a game shop clerk manually opens and closes the lid member 160. However, the lid member 160 is driven to open and close by a drive source. When a situation in which the medal M cannot be counted by the counting device 190 occurs, such as when the discharged medal M is clogged or the collecting device (not shown) provided in the gaming machine installation island becomes unable to collect due to a malfunction. The lid member 160 may be configured to be automatically closed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, when the lid member 160 is in a closed state, the receiving portion 140 is closed with the front surface side of the lid plate 160a of the lid member 160 being inclined. Even if an object such as dust is placed on the front surface side of the cover plate 160a of the member 160, the object 160 can be prevented from sliding on the cover plate 160a.

  In addition, the introduction path cover 141 extends upward from the introduction port 142, and the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b through which the nozzle 150 can be inserted in the front-rear direction intersecting with the introduction (movement) direction of the medal M. The receiving portion 140 is provided at a position above the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b. Therefore, while ensuring the storage space of the medal storage unit 183, the nozzle 150 as the guide member can be disposed at a position corresponding to the slot machine 1, and the counting device 190 is disposed at a position below the medal storage unit 183. However, since the receiving portion 140 can be disposed at a position above the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b, that is, the nozzle 150, the nozzle 150 becomes an obstacle when the medal M is inserted. There is no.

  In addition, since it is not necessary to arrange the counting device 190 above the medal storage unit 183, not only can the storage space of the medal storage unit 183 be sufficiently secured, but the medal M stored in the medal storage unit 183 can also be stored. Since there is no need to pump up to the nozzle 150, the apparatus does not become large.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the accepting unit 140 includes a medal insertion unit 4 as a game operation unit operated to advance the game of the slot machine 1 arranged adjacently, Since the switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged at almost the same height, not only does the player feel uncomfortable when the medal M is inserted, but also the game is operated. However, it becomes easier to insert the medal M.

  Further, since the receiving unit 140 is disposed at a position higher than the nozzle 150, the distance from the introduction port 142 to the counting device 190 becomes longer, so even if a hand or a foreign object is inserted from the introduction port 142, Since it becomes difficult to approach the counting device 190 from the introduction port 142, it is possible not only to suppress an illegal counting act and the like, but also to avoid the risk of injury by inserting a finger into the counting device 190 by mistake.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the receiving portion 140 is formed so as to expand at least toward the player side from the introduction path cover 141, so that the insertion slot approaches the player side, so that the medal M is inserted. It becomes easy to do.

  The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a and a front door 1b that can be opened and closed with the left side of the housing 1a as a center. The receiving unit 140 has a rotating shaft 147 that faces in the left-right direction. Since the receiving portion 140 can be rotated and retracted upward by being rotated, the interference can be prevented when the front door 1b is opened.

  In addition, at a predetermined position above the nozzle 150 inside the introduction path cover 141, the posture of the medal M received by the receiving unit 140 is indicated, and the front and back surfaces of the medal M are the introduction direction (vertical direction) of the medal M. Since the rod-shaped members 146a to 146c that are changed to the horizontal posture along the direction intersecting with respect to the front (front-rear direction) are provided, the posture of the medal M that is received and dropped by the receiving unit 140 is higher than the nozzle 150 Since the medal M easily passes through the narrow path K1, the medal M is in the same posture before reaching the introduction port 142, and is aligned with the counting device 190. Since it is introduced, the occurrence of clogging of medals in the counting device 190 can be suppressed.

  The rod-shaped members 146a to 146c are substantially parallel to the side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141 with a predetermined gap (K1 left-right width> 2R), that is, intersecting the medal M introduction direction (vertical direction). By being provided along the direction (front-rear direction), the posture of the medal M can be changed with a simple configuration.

  The nozzle 150 is extended from the dispensing device 182 to the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b, and is connected to the base 151 and extends from the front insertion hole 143a toward the player. The base 151 is formed so as not to be deformable, and the protrusion 152 is formed so as to be deformable at least toward the slot machine 1 with respect to the base 151. Therefore, since the base 151 inserted through the introduction path cover 141 cannot be deformed, the drop of the medal M is not hindered, and the protrusion 152 can be deformed to the slot machine 1 side to be paid out. Since the medal M can be directly guided to the slot machine 1, the usability is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 of the introduction path cover 141 is opened and closed by the lid member 160, but a lid member for opening and closing the introduction port 142 of the counting device 190 is provided. It may be. In addition, the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ constituting the bottom surface portion of the introduction path cover 141 are configured as detachable lid members, and when the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ are removed, the inlet 142 of the counting device 190 is provided. It may be configured such that the medal M cannot be introduced.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 9, an open / close sensor 190k is provided at a position where the lid member 160 contacts when the lid member 160 of the receiving unit 140 is in the closed state. The open / close sensor 190k detects whether or not the lid member 160 is in a closed state. For example, the open / close sensor 190 may be configured by a sensor that can detect the proximity of an object such as a proximity sensor, or may be configured by a sensor that can detect contact of the object such as a limit switch. May be. The open / close sensor 190k may be attached to another position as long as the lid member 160 can detect whether or not the medal M cannot be inserted, or may have another structure. May be.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, a medal detection sensor 190h is provided in the narrow path K1. The medal detection sensor 190h detects whether or not the medal M has passed through the narrow path K1. In the present embodiment, the medal detection sensor 190h is configured by a pair of a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion of a photosensor provided at both ends of a diagonal line of a rectangular cross section of the narrow path K1. However, the medal detection sensor 190h is not limited to such a structure, and may be another structure as long as it can detect whether or not the medal M has passed through the narrow path K1.

  15 to 16 show a medal lending machine 100 as a modification of the present invention. FIG. 15 is a front view of an essential part showing a medal lending machine as a modification of the present invention. FIG. 16 is a partial longitudinal sectional view of the medal lending machine of FIG.

  In the embodiment, the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b for inserting the nozzle 150 are formed on one end side (for example, the right side) in the left-right width direction in the introduction path K, and the other end (left end) of the nozzle 150 is formed. The narrow path K1 is formed only on the side, but as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b for inserting the nozzle 150 are provided on the left and right sides in the introduction path K. It may be formed at a substantially central position in the width direction, and narrow paths K2, K2 may be formed on both the left and right sides of the nozzle 150.

  A protective member 145A that guides the medal M falling from above to the left and right sides of the nozzle 150 and bypasses the nozzle 150 so as not to collide with the nozzle 150 is bridged in the front-rear direction above the front insertion hole 143a. It may be provided as follows. The protective member 145A is formed of a plate-like plate material having a substantially square shape when viewed from the front by guide inclined surfaces 145a and 145a that are inclined downward from the center in the left-right direction.

  In addition, since the posture of the medal M is changed to the horizontal posture also when the medal M is guided by the guide inclined surfaces 145a and 145a of the protective member 145A, the guide inclined surfaces 145a and 145a constitute posture changing means. Yes.

  Here, the lateral width L21 of the protection member 145A that protects the nozzle 150 occupies about half of the lateral width L20 of the introduction path K (L21≈2 / L20). Note that the front-rear width L10 (see FIG. 6) of the introduction path K is wider than the diameter 2R of the medal M (L10> 2R). The nozzle 150 and the protection member 145A are arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the introduction path K, so that the introduction path K is bifurcated, and a narrow path on the left and right sides of the nozzle 150 and the protection member 145A. K2 and K2 are formed. Since the left and right width L22 of the narrow path K2 is wider than the diameter 2R of the medal M (L22> 2R), the medal M is not clogged, but is positioned above the narrow paths K2 and K2. Since the posture has been changed by the rod-shaped members 146a to 146c, it passes smoothly.

  Therefore, the medal M dropped on the protection member 145A is guided to the left or right by the left and right guiding inclined surfaces 145a and passes through the narrow paths K2 and K2 between the nozzle 150 and the left and right side plates 141b. Since the medal M is not directly dropped onto the nozzle 150 by being protected by the protective member 145A as described above, it is possible to prevent the medal M from being adversely affected by the nozzle 150 being damaged.

  The medal M that has passed through the narrow paths K2 and K2 is guided to the rear side by the inclined plate 141c in the lower part and to the center in the left-right direction by the inclined plate 141d, and then passes through the introduction port 142 and passes through the opening / closing plate 102. Guided to the back side. Then, it slides down on the inclined plate 141 c and falls into the counting device 190 from the counting port 191.

  In addition, a protective member 145A that covers the top of the nozzle 150 is provided inside the introduction path cover 141, and the protective member 145A allows the medal M falling from the receiving portion 140 to pass through the left and right sides of the nozzle 150. By providing the guiding inclined surface 145a to be guided, not only is it prevented that the falling medal M collides with the nozzle 150 that is inserted through the introduction path cover 141, but the nozzles are prevented by the guiding inclined surface 145a. Since the medal M is guided in a direction to avoid 150, the fall of the medal M is not hindered.

  In the embodiment, the posture is changed by the rod-shaped members 146a to 146c. However, as described above, the inclination is inclined with respect to the moving direction of the medal M like the guide inclined surface 145a of the protective member 145A. It may be a plate-like member provided. Further, for example, various posture changing means such as a spiral linear member or a nozzle tapered toward the tip may be adopted.

  In the embodiment, the screw insertion holes 108a and 108b through which the screws 107 as the maintaining means are inserted are provided in the left side plate 141b in the receiving portion 140, and the screws 107 inserted through the screw insertion holes 108a and 108b are provided. A screw insertion hole through which a screw 107 ′ as a maintaining means is inserted is screwed into a female screw hole 162 provided in the side surface of the lid member side plate 160 b. 108c is provided through the open / close plate 102 on the back side of the receiving portion 140, and a female screw hole 162 'into which a screw 107' inserted through the screw insertion hole 108c is screwed is formed with a thick lid. You may make it provide in the front-end | tip of the member side board 160b. By doing so, it becomes possible for an operator other than an operator such as a game shop clerk who can remove the opening and closing plate 102 to operate the screw 107, and prevents the player from opening the lid member 160 illegally. be able to.

  In the embodiment, the screw insertion holes 108a and 108b through which the screws 107 as the maintaining means are inserted are provided in the left side plate 141b in the receiving portion 140, and the screws 107 inserted through the screw insertion holes 108a and 108b are provided. The screw member 162 is screwed into the female screw hole 162 provided on the side surface of the lid member side plate 160b. However, the maintaining means is not limited to the mode using the screw 107, and other means may be used. For example, as shown in the modified example of FIG. 18, a concave portion 170 is provided on the side surface of the lid member side plate 160b, and an engaging convex portion 172 that protrudes outward by an urging means such as a spring 171 is provided in the concave portion 170. Even if the engaging convex portion 172 is engaged with the engaging hole portion 173 formed in the side plate 141b of the receiving portion 140, a maintaining means for maintaining the open state or the closed state of the lid member 160 may be configured. Good. In this case, when the lid member 160 moves to a position where the engaging convex portion 172 corresponds to the engaging hole portion 173, the engaging convex portion 172 and the engaging hole portion 173 are automatically moved by the biasing force of the spring 171. Engaged. When releasing the engagement state, a tool such as a screwdriver D is inserted into the engagement hole 173 from the outside, and the engagement protrusion 172 is resisted against the urging force of the spring 171 to enter the recess 170. And the lid member 160 is moved.

  In the present embodiment, the engaging convex portion 172 biased by the screw 107, the spring 171 or the like is used as the maintaining means for maintaining the open or closed state of the lid member 160. The means is not limited to the mode using the screw 107, the spring 171 and the like, but may be other modes. For example, an adhesive member having an adhesive force is provided at a portion of the receiving portion 140 that contacts the tip of the lid member 160 when the lid member 160 is in a closed state, and the closed state of the lid member 160 is maintained by the adhesive member. Alternatively, when the lid member 160 is made of a magnetizable metal such as iron and is in a closed state, a magnet member is provided at a portion of the receiving portion 140 where the tip of the lid member 160 comes into contact. The closed state of the lid member 160 may be maintained. Further, the maintaining means may not be able to completely maintain the closed state of the lid member 160, as long as at least the lid member 160 is difficult to open or it takes time to open the lid member 160. The lid member 160 may not be easily opened even if it is moved slightly.

  In the above embodiment, the introduction path member constituting the introduction path K includes the introduction path cover 141 and the opening / closing plate 102. However, the introduction path K may be constituted by a single cylindrical member or the like. Good.

  FIG. 19 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the medal lending machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The control unit 181 of the present embodiment includes a central processing circuit (CPU) 181a capable of executing a control program, a visitor card being received by the internal card reader / writer 187, a (member) card ID of a member card, a prepaid balance, A RAM 181b capable of storing various data such as the number of medals, the number of stored medals, the number of points visited, the data of the corresponding slot machine 1 and the game information of members in the game, and a central processing circuit (CPU) 181a EEPROM 181c which is a nonvolatile memory capable of rewriting and storing setting information including the control program to be executed and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100, and a real-time clock (RTC) 181d capable of outputting time information, calendar information, etc. including. The RAM 181b is backed up by a battery (not shown), and the stored data is retained for a predetermined period even when the power is shut off. Further, the control unit 181 can perform bidirectional data communication with various computers via the communication unit 184 and the HUB 70 described above.

  Further, the control unit 181 includes a display control board 129 for controlling the liquid crystal display 123 and the touch panel 124, a bill recognition unit 180, a state notification lamp 111, an internal card reader / writer 187, and a face image shooting. An audio control board (not shown) for controlling the camera 188, the payout device 182 and a speaker (not shown) is connected. In the speaker, notification from the medal lending machine 100 is performed by voice. The medal lending machine 100 itself may be configured to output a control signal for notification from the speaker of the calling lamp 200 without providing a means for outputting a voice. Further, the control unit 181 is connected to a reset switch 186 for resetting values of the total medal storage number, the own store medal storage number, and the fake medal storage number of medal information described later. The reset switch 186 is provided inside the casing 101 and can be operated when the opening / closing plate 102 (see FIG. 2) at the lower front of the casing 101 is opened.

  An open / close plate key 106 is provided at the upper end of the open / close plate 102 (see FIG. 2). By locking with the opening / closing plate key 106, the opening / closing plate 102 is detachably attached to the front side of the medal lending machine 100. The opening / closing plate 102 cannot be removed unless a predetermined key (not shown) carried by a store clerk or the like of the game hall is inserted into the opening / closing plate key 106. The reset switch 186 is pressed when a store clerk empties a medal storage box 194 described later.

  In addition, a lending operation board 189 is connected to the control unit 181. The lending operation board 189 includes a card balance display 115 ′ corresponding to the card balance display unit 115, a medal lending button switch 116 ′ corresponding to the medal lending button 116, and a return button switch corresponding to the return button 114. 114 ′, a deposit enabling lamp 113, a medal lending lamp 117, a medal expired lamp 118, and a counting button switch 122 ′ corresponding to the counting button 122 are provided.

  Further, a replay operation board 185 is connected to the control unit 181. On the replay operation board 185, the code number display unit 119 ′ corresponding to the code number display unit 119, the numeric keypad switch 120 ′ corresponding to the numeric keypad 120, and the replay button switch 121 corresponding to the replay button 121 are displayed. 'And is provided.

  Further, the control unit 181 is connected to a counting device 190 provided at a lower position of the medal lending machine 100 so that each counting signal from the counting device 190 can be input. In response to the input of the counting signal from the counting device 190, various tables to be described later are updated. The counting device 190 is provided with the above-described medal photographing camera 190c and the flow path switching unit 190d, and an LED unit 190f corresponding to a light emitting unit 165 described later. Further, the counting device 190 is provided with a memory 190b for temporarily storing medal images taken by the medal shooting camera 190c, and a controller 190a for controlling these devices and determining the authenticity of the medal M. Further, the counting device 190 is provided with the aforementioned open / close sensor 190k and medal detection sensor 190h.

  In the card table stored in the RAM 181b of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20A, the (member) card ID read from the visitor card or member card inserted into the card reader / writer 187, and the member ID (member card only), PIN (member card only), (member) card ID and prepaid balance based on prepaid balance data, number of medals specified from card ID, (member) card ID and member The number of saving medals specified from the ID (member only), the number of points visited from the member ID (member only), the deposit remaining amount corresponding flag indicating whether or not the card is a deposit remaining amount corresponding card, A card lock valid flag indicating whether the card lock function for the card is valid or invalid, and the card in the theft card restriction function Theft card flag indicating whether or not the card has been registered for theft, the number of today's jackpots counted by the history counting process of the game history counting function for the card, and a small-scale lending function for the card A small-lot lending valid flag indicating whether is valid or invalid is stored.

  The deposit remaining amount correspondence card is a membership card or a visitor card discharged in step Sh15 in FIG. 42 executed in step Sg11 in FIG. 41 when a “remaining amount withdrawal” button in FIG. 40 described later is operated. The remaining amount corresponding card is associated.

  The card lock function is a function that prevents the card from being returned or the card lock function from being switched from valid to invalid unless the password is entered. In the present embodiment, when the card lock function is enabled, the ball splitting function and the post-card insertion function, which will be described later, cannot be executed unless a password is entered. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any function that is restricted from being executed when the card lock function is effective may be any function.

  The stolen card restriction function is a function that restricts a stolen card from being used by registering a stolen card. The registration of the theft card is performed as follows.

  For example, the card ID received in the unit management table of FIG. 25 of the medal management computer 550 by inputting the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 and the time during which the card has been used in the card management computer 500. And the theft card flag of the card ID is registered in the on state in the member card table or visitor card table of FIG.

  Alternatively, immediately after being stolen, the store clerk inputs to the medal lending machine 100 that the card has been stolen with the remote controller, so that the card of the card used immediately before the member card table or the visitor card table in FIG. The theft card flag corresponding to the ID is registered as an on state.

  The game history totaling function is a function of totaling game history (for example, the number of jackpots, the number of jackpot fluctuations, the number of reach, etc.) in association with the card ID of the card. The small amount lending function is a function that lends medals for an amount smaller than the normal lending unit amount. For example, normally, lend medal in units of 1000 yen, but the small amount lending function sets 1000 yen or less. It is possible to lend in the amount of money, for example, in units of 100 yen.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the game information stored in the RAM 181b includes game information from when the member card or visitor card is inserted into the card reader / writer 187, that is, the inserted game information. The game information relating to the game of the player who has the member card or visitor card that has been played is collected.

  Specifically, the start time (card acceptance time) when the player started the game, the end time (card return time) when the player finished the game, the player's game time, and the player's card The number of used medals indicating the number of medals used since receiving the player, the number of replay medals used for replay after receiving the player's card (member only), and the counting device after receiving the player's card When a medal inserted in 190 is determined as an illegal medal, the cumulative illegal medal number indicating the cumulative number determined as the illegal medal is stored, and a player playing a game in the corresponding slot machine 1 plays a game. The game information can be grasped since it started.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20C, the medal information stored in the RAM 181b (storage means) includes the total number of medals paid out as a total number of medals paid out today from the payout device 182 and the counting device. The total number of medals (the number of counting game media) that is the total number of medals inserted in 190 today, the total number of illegal medals that is the total number of medals determined to be illegal by the counting device 190, and the counting device The total number of medals stored in the medal storage box 194 is determined to be an illegal medal at 190, and among the total number of medals stored, the medals are used in other areas of the store. The stored number of own medals indicating the number of stored own medals, and the number of stored false medals indicating the number of stored false medals that are medals brought in from other stores or the like are stored.

  Further, in the RAM 181b, as shown in FIG. 20 (d), when it is determined that the medals inserted into the counting device 190 are continuously unauthorized medals, 1 is incremented and updated (incremented). A medal counter is set.

  Next, the card management computer 500 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 21, a card management computer 500 used in the present embodiment has a CPU 502 that performs various processes executed by the card management computer 500 on a data bus 501 that transmits and receives data inside the computer. RAM 503 used as a work memory, RTC 504 for outputting time information and calendar information, a storage device 505 including a hard disk, an input device 506 such as a keyboard and a mouse, a display device 507 for displaying and outputting various screens, and various information A printer 508 for print output, a communication unit 509 that performs data communication with each device such as a medal lending machine 100 (control unit 181) and a card issuing / payment machine connected to a local area network (LAN), and a card company. Data communication with the management server 82 Cormorant digital service unit (DSU) 510 is connected is a conventional computer.

  The storage device 505 has a membership card table (FIG. 22) for managing the prepaid balance remaining in the membership card, in addition to a processing program in which processing contents for performing various processing executed in the card management computer 500 are described. (See (a)) and a visitor card table (see FIG. 22B) for managing the prepaid balance remaining in the visitor card.

  In the member card table, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), each member card is associated with a member card ID that can be individually identified, and the member ID of the member player who has issued the member card and the prepaid Remaining amount, an unusable flag indicating whether the member card is unusable, a deposit remaining amount corresponding flag indicating whether the member card is a deposit remaining amount corresponding card, and a password used for a card lock function, etc. A card lock valid flag indicating whether the card lock function is valid or invalid, and a theft card flag indicating whether or not the card is registered in the theft card restriction function. Is stored. As a result, from the membership card ID or membership ID stored in the membership card, the prepaid balance, whether or not the membership card can be used, whether or not the membership card is a deposit-amount-compatible card, PIN, and card lock function are valid. It is possible to specify whether or not the card is invalid and whether or not the card is registered as a theft card. In the present embodiment, the membership card password is set in advance when the membership card is issued.

  In the visitor card table, as shown in FIG. 22B, each visitor card is associated with a card ID that can be individually identified, and the status of the visitor card (whether it is being used or stored). ), The latest issue date and time when the member card or visitor card was issued, the prepaid balance, the unusable flag indicating whether or not the card is unusable, and the remaining payment amount of the member card In the remaining deposit amount correspondence flag indicating whether or not the card is compatible, a card lock valid flag indicating whether the card lock function for the card is valid, a PIN number used for the card lock function, etc., and a theft card restriction function A theft card flag indicating whether or not the card has been registered that the card has been stolen is stored. As a result, based on the card ID stored in the visitor card, the prepaid balance, whether or not the visitor card can be used, whether or not the member card is a deposit balance compatible card, the latest issue date and time, whether the card lock function is valid or invalid The personal identification number and whether or not the card is registered as a theft card can be specified.

  The card management computer 500 (CPU 502) according to the present embodiment transmits the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 and the acceptance received from each medal lending machine 100 in response to acceptance of the member card or visitor card in the medal lending machine 100. A card that determines whether or not the member card or visitor card can be used and returns it to the medal lending machine 100 in response to reception of a card acceptance notification including the (member) card ID read from the member card or visitor card and the prepaid balance Execute the acceptance process.

  Further, the card management computer 500 (CPU 502) of the present embodiment is included in the received lending completion notification in response to the reception of the lending completion notification transmitted along with the lending processing in the medal lending machine 100 (membership). ) Subtraction update processing for subtracting and updating the tax-included usage amount included in the lending completion notice from the prepaid balance stored in the member card table or visitor card table corresponding to the card ID is performed.

  In addition, the card management computer 500 (CPU 502) of the present embodiment receives the card payment notice in response to the receipt of the card payment notice transmitted along with the execution of the issue / payment process in the medal lending machine 100 or the card issuance / payment machine. Corresponding to the (member) card ID included in the card payment notification, a payment update process is performed to add and update the payment amount included in the card payment notification to the prepaid balance stored in the member card table or visitor card table.

  Next, the medal management computer 550 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 23, the medal management computer 550 used in the present embodiment has a central operation for performing various processes executed by the medal management computer 550 on a data bus 551 that transmits and receives data inside the computer. A processing unit (CPU) 552, a RAM 553 used as a work memory, a real-time clock (RTC) 554 that outputs time information and calendar information, a storage device 555 including a hard disk, an input device 556 such as a keyboard and a mouse, various types It is a normal computer to which a display device 557 for displaying and outputting a screen, a printer 558 for printing various information, and a communication unit 559 for performing data communication with a medal lending machine 100 connected to a local area network (LAN). .

  The storage device 555 stores the member player on the business day owned by the member player who possesses the member card in addition to the processing program in which the processing contents for performing various processes executed by the medal management computer 550 are described. Recorded in the visitor card and the member saving management table (see FIG. 24A) for managing the number of medals acquired by the member and the number of saving medals acquired by the member player before the business day. A visitor saving management table (see FIG. 24 (b)) for managing the number of medals earned on the day of business by the player possessing the visitor card, and the total of the medals lending machine 100 in the game hall at that time. A unit management table for managing the number of illegal medals and the like and the cards accepted by each medal lending machine 100 ( 25), a member information table (see FIG. 26 (a)) in which member information relating to the member player who owns the member card is stored, and a member ID of the member player that can identify the member player. A member-specific game history table (see FIG. 26B) in which a game history including game information is stored is stored.

  In the member saving management table, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), a member ID which is member identification information which can be associated with each member card ID and which can individually identify the member player who has issued the member card. And the total number of medals earned by the member player on that business day, which is the number of medals that are not used for game or prize exchange, and the member player obtained before that business day. The number of saved medals, which is the total number of medals earned and not used for game or prize exchange, and the number of today's jackpots counted by the history counting process of the game history counting function for the card are stored. Yes. Thereby, from the card ID or member ID stored in the member card, the number of medals possessed by the member player, the number of stored medals, and the number of hits of the day can be specified.

  The number of medals managed in the member savings management table is managed as the number of medals only on the day of business, and the number of medals present in the member savings management table in the closing process after the closing of business is the savings medal All are reset after being added to the number. Further, the number of jackpots managed in the member saving management table is reset after being added to the cumulative number of jackpots in the member-specific game history table of FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), the visitor saving management table associates each visitor card with an individually identifiable card ID, and possesses the latest issue date and time of the visitor card and the visitor card. The total number of medals earned by the player on that business day, which is the number of medals that have not been used for game or prize exchange, and is counted by the history counting process of the game history counting function for the card. The number of today's big hits is stored. Thereby, from the card ID memorize | stored in the visitor card | curd, the number of medals possessed by the said player and today's jackpot number can be specified now.

  Note that the number of medals managed in the visitor savings management table is valid only on the day of the business, and all medals existing in the visitor savings management table are reset in the closing process after the end of business. , Disabled. The number of jackpots managed in the visitor savings management table is valid only on the business day, and is reset after the business ends.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the unit management table stores the local IP address of the medal lending machine 100 in association with the device ID uniquely assigned to each medal lending machine 100 installed in the game hall. IP, an installed island that stores the island number of the game island where the medal lending machine 100 is installed, and a situation that stores whether the medal lending machine 100 is accepting a card or is waiting. The corresponding machine number in which the machine number of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the medal lending machine 100 is stored, the reception ID in which the card ID of the member card or the visitor card being accepted is stored, and each medal lending machine at that time The total number of illegal medals counted at 100, the total number of medals stored in each medal lending machine 100, the number of own store medals, the number of false medals stored The medal-related information is stored, and the latest medal-related information is managed by being periodically transmitted from each medal lending machine 100 in a counting process described later executed by the medal management computer 550. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the member information table is associated with the member ID of the member player who owns the member card, and the personal identification number for identification and the day of receiving the member card. Membership consisting of store visit points where the predetermined store visit points are added and updated once, rank based on store visit status, member's name (last name and name), gender, age, birthday, occupation, address, e-mail address Attribute information (personal information) is registered.

  In the member-specific game history table, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), for each member ID, the game history of the member player, specifically, the date of visit to the store, the table of the slot machine 1 that played the game. Game consisting of number, model name, game start time (time), game end time (time), game time from game start to game end, number of replay medals, number of used medals, number of medals, total number of hits History is stored. The visit date of the member-specific game history table stores the date when the game history is stored based on the calendar information output from the RTC 554, and the game history of the game start time, game end time, and game time is This is stored based on member game history data transmitted from the medal lending machine 100 when the card is returned.

  Here, the illegal medal-related settings that can be executed by the medal management computer 550 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 27. In the medal management computer 550 of the present embodiment, the medal lending machine 100 in the game hall is explained. Various settings relating to notifications and operating conditions when detecting illegal medals executed in the above are made possible on the illegal medal related setting screen (threshold setting means) shown in FIG.

  In the illegal medal related setting screen of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, setting items of “unit setting” and “island unit setting” are provided at the upper part of the screen. The slot machine 1 to be set can be designated in units of units or in units of islands.

  For example, if “set by unit” is used, the slot machines 1 to be set can be designated one by one by using the unit number, and if “set by island” is used, a plurality of slot machines 1 to be set can be specified. You can specify each island by island number. If "island unit setting" is used, a game area where a game can be performed with a medal worth 5 yen per one, a game area where a game can be played with a medal worth 20 yen per piece, etc. Can be specified for each amusement island. In the “island unit setting”, the island unit is set so that a plurality of slot machines 1 installed on one side of one amusement island and a plurality of slot machines 1 installed on the other side can be individually set. It is divided.

  Further, the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition” provided on the illegal medal related setting screen is notified when each medal lending machine 100 determines that a medal inserted into the counting device 190 is an illegal medal. A selection input unit is provided for setting “total number of illegal medals”, “cumulative number of illegal medals”, and “number of consecutive illegal medals detected” which are conditions to be performed.

  Further, in the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition”, in the selection input section of “total illegal medal number”, the total number of medals determined as illegal medals by the counting device 190 from the time of starting the game hall, that is, the above-mentioned It can be set to notify when the total number of illegal medals in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) reaches a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment).

  In addition, in the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition”, in the selection input section of “cumulative illegal medal number”, the counting device 190 illegally operates from the time when the player inserts the member card or the visitor card into the medal lending machine 100. Notification is made when the total number of medals determined as medals, that is, the cumulative number of illegal medals (see FIG. 20B) of the above-described card receiving game information reaches a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). Can be set to do.

  In addition, in the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition”, in the selection input unit of “continuous illegal medal detection count”, the number of times that the counting device 190 continuously determines as illegal medal, that is, the above-described counter information consecutive fraud It can be set to notify when a medal counter (see FIG. 20D) reaches a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, when an illegal medal is detected three times in succession).

  In this way, by setting “total number of illegal medals”, “cumulative illegal medals”, and “number of consecutive illegal medals detected”, several medals paid out from the payout device 182 of the medal lending machine 100 are set. When the player counts without noticing that these illegal medals are mixed in (unintentional case), it is not necessary to report them as illegal medals. It is also possible to make a setting so that notification is made when at least one illegal medal is detected.

  Also, in the item of “operation when detecting illegal medals” provided on the illegal medal related setting screen, when the condition set in the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition” is met, an alarm notification (status notification lamp) is set. A check box is provided for selecting whether to turn on 111 and notify medal management computer 550 only) or to stop alarming and counting of counting device 190.

  In addition, in the item “handling of illegal medals” provided on the illegal medal related setting screen, when an illegal medal (own medal or fake medal) is detected in the counting device 190, the illegal medal is stored in the medal storage box 194 ( It can be set whether or not to store in the storage unit. In the “handling of illegal medals”, check boxes for “invalid storage unit”, “discharge illegal medals to the island when the storage unit is full” and “stop error when the storage unit is full” are provided.

  Here, when the check box of “invalid storage unit” is checked, when an illegal medal is detected by the counting device 190, it can be discharged from the discharge port 192 to the game island without being stored in the medal storage box 194. . This “reservoir invalid” setting is a setting used when there is a device for collecting illegal medals by providing a separate medal authenticity determination machine on the game island.

  If the check box “Discharge illegal medals into the island when the storage part is full” is checked, only when the medal storage box 194 (storage part) is full, the medal storage box 194 is not stored, but discharged. It can be discharged from the exit 192 to the game island.

  In addition, if the check box of “Stop error when storage part is full” is checked, when the medal storage box 194 (storage part) becomes full, the counting process of the counting device 190 is stopped and error notification is performed. Can be set.

  In addition, in the item of “reservoir state notification condition” provided on the illegal medal related setting screen, a selection input unit for setting the number of sheets to be “full tank notification condition” and the number of sheets to be “closed notification condition” And a selection input unit for setting.

  Here, in the “full tank notification condition”, it is possible to set a first threshold value (first storage amount) that is the number of medals serving as a reference for determining that the medal storage box 194 (storage unit) is full. . For example, in the present embodiment, the “full tank notification condition” is set to “100”, which is when 100 illegal medals are stored in the medal storage box 194, that is, the above-described medal information. When the total number of medals stored (see FIG. 20C) reaches 100, it is determined that the tank is full. In addition, the medal lending machine 100 notifies the medal management computer 550 while notifying by lighting the state notification lamp 111 as described later when the “full tank notification condition” is satisfied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of medals are stored in the medal storage box 194 (storage unit) when the game hall is closed (when the business is closed), the medals are collected from the medal storage box 194. The medal lending machine 100 is informed by turning on the state informing lamp 111 and is notified to the medal management computer 550. In the “closing notification condition”, a second threshold value (second storage amount), which is the number of medals serving as a reference for determining whether or not the medal lending machine 100 is a target for collecting medals from the medal storage box 194. Settings can be made. For example, in the present embodiment, “50 notifications” (50% of when the store is full) is set as the “closing notification condition”, and this is set to 50 in the medal storage box 194 when the store is closed (when the store is closed). It is set to notify when the number of illegal medals is stored, that is, when the total number of medals stored in the aforementioned medal information (see FIG. 20C) is 50.

  In the present embodiment, medals of different sizes (for example, φ25 medal and φ30 medal) are set by appropriately setting the number of thresholds in the “full tank notification condition” and “closed shop notification condition”. It can be set according to the size of the medal storage box 194 (storage section). For example, even when the same number of medals are stored, the storage amount of the medal storage box 194 (storage unit) changes according to the size of the medals (for example, a φ25 medal becomes full with 100, but φ30 Therefore, it is possible to notify at an appropriate level by changing the threshold according to the size of the medal.

  Hereinafter, the operation of the medal lending machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 45.

  First, as shown in FIG. 30, the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 is activated by turning on the power to the medal lending machine 100, thereby executing the activation process of Sb1, initializing various tables, and each unit. The connection management request, transmission of a connection confirmation request to the card management computer 500, hall computer 540, and medal management computer 550, and the card management computer 500, hall computer 540, medal management computer in response to the transmission of the connection confirmation request. Settings such as initial values are executed for each setting data based on the setting information returned from 550.

  Then, after the activation process is completed, the process of Sb2 to Sb8 is cyclically executed, so that the card acceptance (Sb2), which is the insertion of the membership card or the visitor card into the card insertion slot 112, by the player (member or visitor) Lending button operation (Sb3), cash acceptance by inserting a bill from the bill insertion slot 110 (Sb4), player return button operation (Sb5), replay button 121 operation (Sb6), medal for counting device 190 A standby state is detected in which detection of input (Sb7) and detection of a predetermined error signal (Sb8) are detected.

  When the player inserts a visitor card or a membership card into the card insertion slot 112 in the standby state of these Sb2 to Sb8, the insertion detection information accompanying the insertion of the visitor card or membership card is controlled from the card reader / writer 187. By outputting to the unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that there is card acceptance in Sb 2, proceeds to step Sb 20, and executes card acceptance processing.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the card acceptance processing executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 31, in the card acceptance process of the present embodiment in Sb20, CPU 181a of control unit 181 of medal lending machine 100 issues an instruction for taking in a member card or a visitor card inserted into card insertion slot 112. The data is output to the card reader / writer 187, the inserted member card or visitor card is taken into the card reader / writer 187, and the stored data stored in the member card or visitor card, specifically, the member card or The (member) card ID, member ID (member card only), prepaid balance data, medal count data (visitor card only), etc. of the visitor card are read (step Sn1).

  Then, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 transmits a theft card confirmation request including the (member) card ID read from the accepted member card or visitor card and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 to the card management computer 500 (step). Sn21).

  The CPU 502 of the card management computer 500 indicates that the theft card flag corresponding to the (member) card ID included in the theft card confirmation request is on based on the membership card table or the visitor card table described in FIG. Check whether it is “1”. Based on the confirmation result, information indicating whether the card is a theft card is transmitted to the medal lending machine 100 having the device ID included in the theft card confirmation request.

  The CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the received card is a theft card based on the received information indicating whether or not it is a theft card (step Sn22).

  If it is determined that the card is a theft card (YES in step Sn22), the CPU 181a transmits information indicating that the theft card has been received and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 to the hall computer 540 (step Sn23).

  The hall computer 540 controls the radio broadcast system 20 based on the reception of the information, and informs that the theft card has been received from the income 9 worn by the store clerk and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100. Is output, and the surveillance camera system 21 is controlled to photograph the player who has inserted the theft card into the medal lending machine 100. This makes it possible to identify a player who has attempted to use a card that is suspected of being stolen, and to leave evidence of the use of the stolen card.

  Thereafter, the CPU 181a of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not a reset operation has been performed by determining whether or not a reset signal has been received from a remote control possessed by the store clerk (step Sn24). When determining that there is no reset operation (NO in step Sn24), the CPU 181a repeats this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the store clerk rushed to the medal lending machine 100 and performed a reset operation (YES in step Sn24), the CPU 181a controls the card reader / writer 187 to return the card (step Sn4), and the card Return the process to the caller of the acceptance process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card is not a theft card (NO in step Sn22), the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 includes an authentication request including the (member) card ID, prepaid balance data, and device ID read from the accepted member card or visitor card. Is transmitted to the card management computer 500 (step Sn2). Then, a card authentication process for receiving an authentication result from the card management computer 500 is executed, and it is determined whether or not the authentication is NG (step Sn3).

  When the authentication result returned from the card management computer 500 is “authentication NG” (in the case of YES in step Sn3), the medal lending machine 100 gives a card reader / writer 187 with an instruction to eject the accepted member card or visitor card. And the inserted member card or visitor card is returned to complete the card acceptance process (step Sn4). On the other hand, if the returned authentication result is “authentication OK” (NO in step Sn3), the (member) card ID read from the received card, the member ID (member only), and the prepaid balance are displayed. In addition to storing in the card table, the medal management computer 550 transmits a card acceptance notification including the received (member) card ID, device ID, and medal count (visitor card only) read from the visitor card. Then, a card acceptance notification including the (member) card ID read from the accepted membership card or visitor card and the device ID is transmitted to the card management computer 500 (step Sn5).

  Next, the medal management computer 550 displays the number of medals corresponding to the (member) card ID included in the received card acceptance notification, the number of saved medals (member only), and the number of today's jackpots as a member saving management table or visitor saving management. It is specified from each data stored corresponding to the (member) card ID in the table, and when the card ID is a member card ID, it is stored in the member information table corresponding to the member card ID. The identification number and the visiting points are further identified, and the number of medals held, the number of saved medals (members only), the visiting points (members only), the identification number (members only) and the (member) card ID are accepted. A processing completion notification is returned to the medal lending machine 100 that is the transmission source of the received card acceptance notification.

  In addition, the card management computer 500 displays the PIN code corresponding to the (member) card ID, the card lock valid flag, and the theft card flag included in the received card acceptance notification in the member card table or visitor card table. The medal lending machine 100 that is the sender of the received card acceptance notification is identified from each data stored corresponding to the ID, and the acceptance processing completion notice including the identified personal identification number, card lock valid flag, and theft card flag is received. Reply to

  The CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not a processing completion notification has been received from the medal management computer 550 and the card management computer 500 (step Sn6). In response to the reception of the acceptance processing completion notification (in response to YES in step Sn6), the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 (storage processing means) of the medal lending machine 100 is included in the received acceptance processing completion notification. The number of medals held, the number of saved medals (members only), points to visit (members only), PIN, number of today's jackpots, card lock valid flag, and theft card flag are stored in the card table and stored in the card table. The remaining prepaid balance is displayed on the balance display section 115, and the game information being received (see FIG. 20B) is reset and the time at that time is stored in the “start time” (step Sn7). For members, the same password is received from the medal management computer 550 and the card management computer 500.

  Then, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the accepted card is a deposit-amount-compatible card (step Sn11). In the case of a membership card, whether or not it is a deposit balance card is determined whether the deposit balance correspondence flag stored in the membership card table shown in FIG. 22 of the card management computer 500 is “1”, that is, in an on state. It is determined by inquiring the card management computer 500 whether or not. In the case of a visitor card, in addition to the same method, a deposit remaining amount correspondence flag is recorded on the card itself, so that it may be determined with reference to this.

  When it is determined that the card is a deposit-amount-compatible card (YES in step Sn11), the CPU 181a stores the card ID stored in step Sh14 when executing the later-described balance withdrawal process shown in FIG. This time, it is determined whether or not the card IDs of the accepted cards match (step Sn12). When it is determined that they match (YES in step Sn12), the CPU 181a turns off the deposit balance corresponding flag in the membership card table of the card management computer 500 when it is a membership card, and when it is a visitor card, In addition, the deposit balance corresponding flag recorded on the card itself is also turned off (step Sn13).

  The CPU 181a determines whether or not the remaining amount discharge flag indicating that the deposit remaining amount corresponding card has been discharged is on (step Sn14). If it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is in the on state (YES in step Sn14), the CPU 181a sets the remaining amount discharge flag in the off state, and deletes the card ID of the stored deposit amount correspondence card (step Sn15). Thereafter, the process returns to the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb8.

  Here, the card is received from the outside without storing the remaining amount of money and the number of medals in the medal lending machine 100, and the number of medals and the remaining amount of money to be added later are no longer added to the card corresponding to the remaining amount of deposit. Therefore, in step Sn13 and step Sn15, the deposit remaining amount correspondence flag and the remaining amount discharge flag are turned off.

  Further, when the player operates the lending button, a signal from the lending button switch 116 ′ for detecting the operation of the lending button 116 by the player is output to the control unit 181 so that the control is performed. The unit 181 determines that there is a lending button operation in the step Sb3 in the standby state of Sb2 to Sb8, proceeds to the step Sb21, and executes the lending process for lending the medal M for 1000 yen as described above.

  The lending process is not disabled even when the liquid crystal display 123 displays the number of balls and the number of stored balls. Specifically, the process of step Sb21 is executed regardless of whether the ball information display flag is on or off.

  Further, in the standby state of Sb2 to Sb8 described above, when the player inserts cash (banknote) from the banknote insertion slot 112, the currency identification information accompanying the insertion of the cash (banknote) is controlled from the banknote identification unit 180. By outputting to the unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that there is acceptance of cash in the step of Sb 4, proceeds to the step of Sb 22, and executes issue / payment processing.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the issue / payment process executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 32, in this issuance / payment process, first, CPU 181a of control unit 181 of medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the remaining amount discharge flag indicating that the remaining payment amount corresponding card has been discharged is on. Is determined (step Sk1).

  If it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is on (YES in step Sk1), the CPU 181a indicates that the deposit / remaining amount correspondence card associated with the deposit remaining amount has been discharged and whether or not to continue the deposit as it is. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 for notification. The notification may be notified by voice from a speaker or the like. The display on the liquid crystal display 123 displays a button for inputting that payment is to be continued and a button for inputting that payment is not to be continued.

  When it is determined which input indicating that the deposit is continued or not is performed on the touch panel 124 of the liquid crystal display 123, and when it is determined that the input is not performed (NO in Step Sk3), the CPU 181a The bill recognition unit 180 is controlled so as to be returned. Thereafter, the process returns to the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb8.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is not on (NO in step Sk1), and if it is determined that payment is to be continued (YES in step Sk3), the CPU 181a issues the issuance / payment main. As processing, the following processing is executed (step Sk5).

  In the issuance / payment main processing, first, the amount of money inserted is specified from the input money identification information, and it is determined whether or not there is a member card or visitor card accepted by the card reader / writer 187. .

  When it is determined that there is no member card or visitor card being received, the control unit 181 places the visitor card stored in the card storage unit (not shown) at a predetermined reading position in the card insertion slot 112. The card ID of the visitor card is read out, and an issuance request including the read card ID, the inserted amount, and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 is transmitted to the card management computer 500.

  In response to the receipt of the issuance request, the card management computer 500 determines whether or not the card ID included in the received issuance request exists in the visitor card table, and if it exists, corresponds to the card ID. Update “Status” of the visitor card table to “In Use”, store the current date and time output from the RTC 181d as the latest issue date and time, and store the received input amount as “Prepaid balance” in “Remaining amount” , “Issue permission” is returned to the medal lending machine 100 of the transmission source of the issue request. If the received card ID does not exist in the visitor card table, “Issuance impossible” is returned.

  In addition, with the transmission of the “issue permission”, the card management computer 500 gives the medal management computer 550 an issuance notification including the latest issuance date and time stored, the card ID included in the received issuance request, and the device ID. By notifying the computer 550, the medal management computer 550 stores the latest issue date / time included in the received issue notification in the latest issue date / time of the visitor saving management table corresponding to the card ID included in the received issue notification. At the same time, the “status” of the unit management table corresponding to the device ID included in the received issue notification is updated to “accepting”, and the received card ID is stored in “reception ID” to update the unit management table. To do.

  In response to the reception of the “issue permission”, the control unit 181 (discharge / issue processing means) of the medal lending machine 100 writes and stores the prepaid balance corresponding to the inserted amount in the visitor card moved to the card insertion slot 112. At the same time, the card ID of the visitor card and the prepaid balance corresponding to the inserted amount are stored in the card table, and the prepaid balance is displayed on the balance indicator, and then the issuing / payment processing is terminated and Sb2 to Sb8 Return to the standby state.

  Further, when the player operates the return button 114 in the standby state of Sb2 to Sb8 described above, a signal from the return button switch 114 ′ for detecting the operation of the return button 114 by the player is controlled. As a result of the input to the unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that there is an operation of the return button in Sb5, proceeds to Sb23, and executes return processing.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the contents of the return process executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 33, in this return process, first, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether there is a member card or a visitor card being received by the card reader / writer 187 ( Step Sm1). If it does not exist (NO in step Sm1), the operation is invalidated and the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb8 is restored.

  On the other hand, if it exists (YES in step Sm1), a card lock verification process for verifying whether the card lock function is valid or invalid is executed (step Sm21).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the card lock verification processing executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 34, CPU 181a of control unit 181 of medal lending machine 100 determines whether the card lock function is valid or invalid based on the card lock valid flag in the card table of FIG. 20 (step Ss1). If the CPU 181a determines that the card is invalid (NO in step Ss1), the CPU 181a ends the card lock collation process and returns the process to the caller.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is valid (YES in step Ss1), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 so as to notify the player that the portable terminal used for inputting or locking the code number is held up. . Then, the CPU 181a determines whether a personal identification number has been input or whether a portable terminal held up has been detected (step Ss3). If it is determined that there is none (NO in step Ss3), the CPU 181a repeats this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is any (YES in step Ss3), the CPU 181a determines whether the input personal identification number or the terminal ID of the portable terminal held up matches the personal identification number in the card table of FIG. These are collated (step Ss4). Thereafter, the card lock verification process is terminated, and the process is returned to the caller.

  Returning to FIG. 33, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the card lock function is invalid as a result of the card lock collation process, or whether or not the collation is performed by collating the personal identification number. If it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sm22), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sm23). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card lock function is invalid or matched by collation of the password (YES in step Sm22), the CPU 181a invalidates the operation of the return button 114 and A count prohibition instruction is output to prohibit a new count (step Sm2).

  Then, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 gives the medal management computer 550 the device ID of the medal lending machine 100, the card ID of the returned card, the number of medals stored in the card table, the number of saved medals (only members) ) And a return notification including the number of jackpots (step Sm3).

  In response to the reception of the return notification, the medal management computer 550 stores the number of medals held in the member saving management table or the visitor saving management table corresponding to the (member) card ID included in the received return notification, and the savings. The number of medals (member only) and the number of jackpots are updated to the number of medals held, the number of saved medals and the number of jackpots included in the received return notification, and the “status” corresponding to the device ID received in the unit management table is set to “standby” The card ID stored in the “accepting ID” is deleted, and an update completion notification is transmitted to the medal lending machine 100 that is the transmission source of the return notification.

  The CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not an update completion notification has been received from the medal management computer 550 (step Sm4). In response to receiving this update completion notification (in response to YES in step Sm4), the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the receiving card is a visitor card. (Step Sm11). If it is a visitor card (YES in step Sm11), the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information is recorded on the visitor card (step Sm12).

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the remaining amount discharge flag is on (step Sm13). When it is determined that it is in the on state (YES in step Sm13), the liquid crystal display 123 notifies that the deposit remaining amount correspondence card associated with the deposit remaining amount has been discharged (step Sm14). The notification may be output by voice from a speaker.

  Then, the fact that the card corresponding to the deposit balance is discharged and recorded is recorded in the receiving visitor card (step Sm15). Next, the CPU 181a turns off the remaining amount discharge flag, and deletes the card ID of the stored deposit-amount-compatible card (step Sm16).

  If it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is not on (NO in step Sm13), and after step Sm16, the CPU 181a outputs a discharge instruction to the card reader / writer 187, and the received visitor card or membership card is carded. Next, the CPU 181a resets the card table, cancels the invalidation of the operation of the return button 114, validates it, and cancels the count prohibition (step Sm18). Then, the process returns to the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb8.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp and manage how many illegal medals are counted by a predetermined player by recording the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information on the visitor card.

  Further, when the player operates the replay button 121 in the standby state of Sb2 to Sb8 described above, the replay operation information is controlled from the replay operation board 185 that detects the operation of the replay button 121. As a result of the input to the unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that there is an operation of the replay button 121 in Sb6, proceeds to Sb24, and executes replay processing.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the replay processing executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 35, in this replay process, first, CPU 181a of control unit 181 of medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the ball information display flag is in an on state (step Sp10). The ball information display flag is a flag indicating whether or not the holding / storing ball information screen shown in FIG. 47 is being displayed, and will be described in detail later.

  If it is determined that the ball information display flag is on (YES in step Sp10), the CPU 181a ends this replay process and returns the process to be executed to the caller process. In other words, the replay execution is disabled while the held ball / stored ball information screen of FIG. 47 is being displayed.

  Note that even if a gaming device such as another medal lending machine 100 accepts a recording medium such as a member card with the same member ID, the member card with the same member ID as the member card or the medal Other medal lending machines on the premise that with the portable terminal having the same member ID as the member card held over the portable terminal communication unit of the lending machine 100, it is possible to pay out the coins / storing balls corresponding to the member ID When a recording medium such as a membership card is received by a gaming device such as 100 and the number of possessed balls and the number of stored balls corresponding to the membership card are displayed as shown in FIG. 47, the medal lending machine 100 or the like Also in the gaming apparatus, the payout of the coins and storage balls corresponding to the recording medium such as the membership card having the same membership ID as the membership card or the portable terminal may be disabled.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball information display flag is not on (NO in step Sp10), the CPU 181a executes a replay main process (step Sp1).

  In the replay main process, the payout device 182 is controlled so that the number of medals or the number of saved medals managed by the medal management computer 550 is subtracted and the subtracted amount is paid out. When there are medals, the medals are paid out, and when there are no medals and there are saved medals, the medals are paid out. If there is none, nothing is paid out even if the replay button 121 is operated.

  After the replay main process, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the number of medals has become 0 (step Sp2). If it is determined that the number of medals has become 0 (YES in step Sp2), the CUP 181a determines whether or not the remaining amount discharge flag shown in FIG. 31 is on (step Sp3). If it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is on (YES in step Sp3), the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 that the payment remaining amount correspondence card associated with the remaining amount is displayed on the liquid crystal display 123. (Step Sp4). The notification may be output by voice from a speaker.

  Next, the CPU 181a turns off the remaining amount discharge flag, and deletes the card ID of the stored deposit-amount-compatible card (step Sp5). When it is determined that the number of medals is not 0 (NO in step Sp2) or the remaining amount discharge flag is not on (NO in step Sp3), and after step Sp5, the process returns to the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb8. .

  In addition, in the standby state of Sb2 to Sb8 described above, when a predetermined error signal is input from each device to the control unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that an error has been detected in Sb8 and proceeds to Sb26 to report an error. Execute the process.

  In addition, after the above-described standby state of Sb2 to Sb8, the CUP 181a executes touch panel operation processing (step Sb27). The touch panel operation process will be described with reference to FIG. After the touch panel operation process, the CPU 181a executes a counting process.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the counting process executed by the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. Referring to FIG. 36, first, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 determines whether or not the rotating disk 190g is stopped (step Sc21). If it is determined that the rotating disk is stopped (YES in step Sc21), that is, if it is determined that the medal M is not being counted, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the counting button 122 has been operated (step Sc22). .

  If it is determined that the count button 122 has been operated (YES in step Sc22), the CPU 181a changes the manual count flag to the on state (step Sc23) in order to start the manual count process, and executes the process to be executed in step Sc27. Proceed to

  On the other hand, when determining that the counting button 122 has not been operated (NO in step Sc22), the CPU 181a determines whether or not a condition for starting the automatic counting process is satisfied in steps Sc24 to Sc25.

  Specifically, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the lid member is in an open state (step Sc24), and determines whether or not a medal is detected by the medal detection sensor 190h (step Sc25).

  If it is determined that any of the conditions is not satisfied (NO in step Sc24, NO in step Sc25), the CPU 181a ends the counting process and returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that both conditions are satisfied (YES in step Sc24 and YES in step Sc25), CPU 181a determines whether or not the above-described ball information display flag is not in an on state (step Sc26). If it is determined that the ball information display flag is on (YES in step Sc26), the CPU 181a ends the counting process and returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  If it is determined that the ball information display flag is not in the on state (NO in step Sc26), the CPU 181a substitutes a value corresponding to 10 seconds for the counting timer for counting the remaining time for rotating the rotating disk 190g (step Sc27). ), The drive of the rotating disk 190g is started (step Sc28).

  Thereby, when it is determined in step Sc22 that the counting button is operated, the manual counting process is started, and when it is determined that the counting button is not operated, the automatic counting process is started. It will be.

  After step Sc28, that is, after starting the manual counting process or automatic counting process, and when it is determined that the rotating disk 190g is not stopped (NO in step Sc21), that is, the medal M is being counted. If it is determined, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the medal M is detected by the medal detection sensor 190h (step Sc31).

  If it is determined (YES in step Sc31), the CPU 181a substitutes a value corresponding to 10 seconds for the counting timer (step Sc32), thereby resetting the remaining time for rotating the rotating disk to 10 seconds.

  When it is determined that no medal is detected by the medal detection sensor 190h (NO in step Sc31), and after step Sc32, the CPU 181a decrements the counting timer by 1 (step Sc33).

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not a condition for terminating the counting is satisfied from step Sc34 to step Sc37. Specifically, the CPU 181a determines whether the value of the counting timer does not exceed 0 (step Sc34), determines whether the ball information display flag has been turned on (step Sc35), It is determined whether the ball information display flag is not on and the manual counting flag is on (step Sc35, step Sc36). The ball information display flag is not on and the manual counting flag is not on. It is determined whether the lid member 160 is not in the open state (ie, during the automatic counting process) (step Sc35 to step Sc37).

  Either condition is satisfied (NO in step Sc34, YES in step Sc34 and YES in step Sc35, YES in step Sc34 and NO in step Sc35 and YES in step Sc36, or YES in step Sc34 and NO in step Sc35 and When it is determined NO in step Sc36 and NO in step Sc37), the CPU 181a stops driving the rotating disk 190g (step Sc38), ends the manual counting process or the automatic counting process, and calls the process to be executed. Return to the original process.

  On the other hand, it is determined that none of the conditions is satisfied (YES in step Sc34, NO in step Sc35, YES in step Sc36, or YES in step Sc34, NO in step Sc35, NO in step Sc36, and YES in step Sc37). In this case, the CPU 181a acquires medal determination information from the counting device 190 (step Sc2). The medal determination information acquired from the counting device 190 includes medal authenticity information (information on whether a medal is a regular medal or an illegal medal) determined based on a medal image photographed by the medal photographing camera 190c.

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not there is medal determination information (step Sc3). If it is determined that there is no (NO in step Sc3), the CPU 181a ends this process, and returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is medal determination information (YES in step Sc3), the CPU 181a adds 1 to the total number of medals in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) (step Sc5), and the card table (FIG. 1 is added to the number of medals held at 20 (a) (step Sc6).

  Next, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 determines whether or not the counted medals are illegal medals based on the medal determination information acquired from the counting device 190 (step Sc6). Here, the control unit 181 refers to the authenticity information of the medals included in the medal determination information. If it is determined that the medal is an illegal medal (YES in step Sc6), the CPU 181a executes an illegal medal process described later (step Sc12), and executes a medal storage process described later (step Sc13).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not an illegal medal (NO in step Sc6), the CPU 181a resets the value of the continuous illegal medal counter in the counter information (see FIG. 20D) (step Sc7) and is determined to be a regular medal. The medal is discharged from the discharge port 192 to the game island (step Sc8). After step Sc13 and step Sc8, CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the illegal medal process executed by the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. In the illegal medal process, the control unit 181 executes the processes of Sd1 to Sd18 described below.

  First, in Sd1 of the illegal medal process, the control unit 181 uses the face image capturing camera 188 to capture the face image of the player who has inserted the illegal medal, and proceeds to Sd2. In Sd2, the control unit 181 obtains the medal image used for determining the authenticity of the medal from the counting device 190, and proceeds to Sd3.

  In Sd3, the control unit 181 generates a single notification image (see FIG. 29) by combining the player's face image and the medal image in parallel, and stores this notification image in the RAM 181b (imaging data storage means). Then, the process proceeds to Sd4. In Sd4, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the total number of illegal medals in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) and proceeds to Sd5.

  In Sd5, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the continuous illegal medal counter in the counter information (see FIG. 20D), and proceeds to Sd6. In Sd6, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information (see FIG. 20B) and proceeds to Sd7.

  In Sd7, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the value of the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information (see FIG. 20B) is a set threshold value. In the present embodiment, “10 sheets” is set in the “cumulative illegal medal number” item of the “invalid medal detection notification condition” on the aforementioned illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 27). That is, when the cumulative value determined as an illegal medal after the player inserts a member card or a visitor card is 10, the value of the cumulative illegal medal number is set as a threshold. Here, if the value of the cumulative number of illegal medals is a set threshold value (if it is 10), the process proceeds to Sd8, and if the value of the cumulative number of illegal medals is not a set threshold value (if it is less than 10) ) Go to Sd15.

  In Sd8, the control unit 181 subtracts the value of the accumulated illegal medals from the number of medals held in the card table (see FIG. 20A), and proceeds to Sd9. In the present embodiment, if an illegal medal is included in the medals paid out and counted from the slot machine 1, the illegal medal is also counted if the illegal medal detection notification condition (inappropriate condition) is not satisfied. A player who uses an unauthorized medal unintentionally is prevented from being disadvantaged, and when the unauthorized medal detection notification condition is satisfied, the cumulative number of unauthorized medals counted up to that point becomes invalid. It is possible to prevent the number of held medals from being added due to illegal medals.

  In Sd9, the control unit 181 resets the value of the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information (see FIG. 20B) and proceeds to Sd10. In Sd10, the control unit 181 resets the value of the continuous illegal medal counter in the counter information (see FIG. 20D), and proceeds to Sd11.

  In Sd15, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the value of the continuous illegal medal counter in the counter information (see FIG. 20D) is a set threshold value. In the present embodiment, “3 times” is set in the “number of consecutive illegal medals detected” item of the “illegal medal detection notification condition” on the aforementioned illegal medal related setting screen (see FIG. 27). . That is, when an illegal medal is detected three times in succession, the value of the consecutive illegal medal counter becomes a set threshold value. Here, if the value of the consecutive illegal medal counter is the set threshold value (when it is three times), the process proceeds to Sd8, and if the value of the consecutive illegal medal counter is not the set threshold value (when it is less than three times). ) Go to Sd16.

  In Sd16, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the value of the total number of illegal medals in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) is a set threshold value. In the present embodiment, “10” is set in the “total number of illegal medals” item of “illegal medal detection notification condition” on the aforementioned illegal medal related setting screen (see FIG. 27). That is, when the value of the total number of medals determined as illegal medals by the counting device 190 from the time of starting business in the game hall is 10, the total illegal medals count value is set. Here, if the value of the total number of illegal medals is a set threshold value (when it is 10), the process proceeds to Sd11, and if the value of the total number of illegal medals is not a set threshold value (when it is less than 10) ) Ends the process.

  In Sd11, the control unit 181 determines whether or not an unauthorized notification has already been sent to the medal management computer 550. If the notification of unauthorized notification has already been made, the process is terminated, and if the notification of unauthorized notification has not been notified yet, the process proceeds to Sd12.

  In Sd12, the control unit 181 sends a fraud notification notifying the medal management computer 550 that a fraudulent medal is being used, and proceeds to Sd13. In Sd13, the control unit 181 turns on the state notification lamp 111 and proceeds to Sd14. In addition, when the state notification lamp 111 is turned on, if it is turned on in a manner that clearly notifies the abnormal situation (for example, fast blinking or red display), an illegal player who uses an illegal medal is illegal. Since it is noticed that the notification notification is being performed and it may be escaped, it is difficult to notice that the unauthorized player is notified of the unauthorized notification when the state notification lamp 111 is turned on. It is made to light in a mode (for example, slow blinking or blue display).

  The medal management computer 550 that has received the fraud notification notification from the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 issues a notification request for requesting the hall computer 540 to notify the store clerk. And the machine number of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the machine 100.

  In addition, the hall computer 540 that has received the notification request from the medal management computer 550 generates an automatic voice message to notify that, together with the machine number of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the medal lending machine 100 in which the illegal medal is used. Then, an automatic voice message is transmitted to the income 9 worn by the store clerk via the wireless broadcasting system. The store clerk who receives the notification through the income 9 can specify the player who uses the illegal medal. In addition, the hall computer 540 operates the monitoring camera system 21 to automatically shoot (or record) a zoom-in video of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the medal lending machine 100 in which the illegal medal is used. Then, the store clerk can identify an unauthorized player and monitor (or record) the behavior through the monitoring camera system 21.

  In Sd14, the control unit 181 causes the alarm notification and counting stop of the counting device 190 (error stop) when an illegal medal is detected in the item of “Operation for detecting illegal medal” in the above-described illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 27). ) Is determined whether or not the selection is made. If the selection to stop the error has been made, the process proceeds to Sd17. If the selection to stop the error has not been made, the process ends.

  In Sd17, the control unit 181 transmits update information of each table, information on a full tank notification flag, which will be described later, a notification image, and the like to the medal management computer 550, and proceeds to Sd18. In Sd18, the control unit 181 performs a count stop process in which the counting device 190 stops counting medals. This counting stop process is maintained until the store clerk operates the reset switch 186 (see FIG. 19) of the medal lending machine 100.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a medal storage process executed by the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. In the medal storage process, the control unit 181 executes the processes of Se1 to Se14 described below.

  First, in Se1 of medal storage processing, the control unit 181 determines whether or not “reservation part invalid” is set in the item of “illegal medal handling” on the above-described illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 27). Determine. Here, if “reservoir invalid” is not set, the process proceeds to Se2. If “reservoir invalid” is set, the process proceeds to Se14.

  In Se2, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the full tank notification flag is set. If the full tank notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to Se3. If the full tank notification flag is set, the process proceeds to Se14.

  In Se14, the control unit 181 causes the medal determined to be an illegal medal to be discharged from the discharge port 192 to the game island, that is, ends the process without switching the flow path by the flow path switch 190d via the counting device 190. To do.

  In Se3, the control unit 181 switches the medal flow path via the counting device 190 by the flow path switch 190d described above, and the medal determined to be an illegal medal is stored in the medal storage box 194 (storage section). The process proceeds to Se4. In Se4, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the total medal storage number of the medal information (see FIG. 20C) (storage medium counting means), and proceeds to Se5.

  In Se5, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the medal determined to be an illegal medal is a medal brought from another area of the own store, that is, the own store medal. Here, if it is a local store medal, the process proceeds to Se6, 1 is added to the number of stored local medals in the medal information (see FIG. 20C), and the process proceeds to Se7. If it is not the own store medal, the process proceeds to Se11, 1 is added to the number of false medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 20C), and the process proceeds to Se7. In the present embodiment, the own store medals and the fake medals are counted, and the number of the own store medals out of the illegal medals stored in the medal storage box 194 (storage unit). By being easy to grasp, it is possible to return to the area that is collected early and determined as an appropriate medal.

  In Se7, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the total number of medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) is the first threshold (full tank) (first determination means). In the present embodiment, “100 sheets” is set in the “full tank notification condition” item of the “reservoir state notification condition” in the above-described illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 27). . That is, when the total number of medals stored, which is the number of medals stored in the medal storage box 194 (storage unit), is 100, it is determined that the first threshold (full tank) is reached. Here, when the total medal storage number is the first threshold (full tank) (when it is 100), the process proceeds to Se8, and when the total medal storage number is not the first threshold (full tank) (less than 100 sheets). If there is, the process ends.

  In Se8, the control unit 181 sets a full tank notification flag and proceeds to Se9. In Se9, the control unit 181 turns on the state notification lamp 111 (first notification means) and proceeds to Se10.

  In Se10, the control unit 181 determines whether or not “error stop when the storage unit is full” is set in the “illegal medal handling” item of the aforementioned illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 27). To do. Here, if the error stop when the storage unit is full is set, the process proceeds to Se12. If the error stop is not set when the storage unit is full, the process is terminated.

  In Se12, the control unit 181 transmits update information of each table, information on the full tank notification flag, a notification image, and the like to the medal management computer 550, and proceeds to Se13. In Se13, the control unit 181 performs a count stop process in which the counting device 190 stops counting medals. This counting stop process is maintained until the store clerk operates the reset switch 186 (see FIG. 19) of the medal lending machine 100.

  Next, the unauthorized medal user face image screen displayed on the medal management computer 550 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A notification image in which the player's face image and medal image generated in the aforementioned illegal medal process are combined in parallel is transmitted from the medal lending machine 100, and the medal management computer 550 that receives this notification image uses the illegal medal The notification image can be displayed on the person face image screen.

  In the unauthorized medal user face image screen of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, together with the notification image, the date and time when the notification image was captured, and the apparatus of the medal lending machine 100 that captured the notification image An ID, a machine number of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the medal lending machine 100, and a member ID when a game is played using a member card are displayed. By doing so, it is possible to identify which one of the medals stored in the medal storage box 194 (storage unit) of the medal lending machine 100 has been used by a predetermined player, so that it is easy to specify an illegal act.

  In the present embodiment, a closing-related process request for making a request to execute a closing-related process (business closing process) from the medal management computer 550 to each medal lending machine 100 when the game hall is closed (when the business is closed). (Predetermined signal) is transmitted. The control unit 181 of each medal lending machine 100 that has received this tightening related process request executes a tightening related process (business closing process).

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a tightening related process executed by the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. In the tightening related process, the control unit 181 executes processes Sf1 to Sf4 described below.

  First, in Sf1 of the tightening related process, the control unit 181 transmits various histories. For example, information such as a prepaid balance usage history is transmitted to the card management computer 500, and data such as forced cancellation history data in the absence of seat is transmitted to both the card management computer 500 and the medal management computer 550, and the process proceeds to Sf2. .

  In Sf2, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the total number of medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (second threshold) (second determination unit). In the present embodiment, “50 sheets” is set in the “Closed state notification condition” item of the “Storage section state notification condition” on the above-described illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 27). That is, when the total number of medals stored as the number of illegal medals stored in the medal storage box 194 (storage unit) is 50 or more, it is determined to be the second threshold value. Here, if the total number of medals is greater than or equal to the second threshold (if it is greater than or equal to 50), the process proceeds to Sf3. If the total number of medals is not the second threshold (if less than 50), processing is performed. Exit.

  In Sf3, the control unit 181 turns on the state notification lamp 111 (second notification means) and proceeds to Sf4. In Sf4, the control unit 181 transmits to the medal management computer 550 a notification notifying that the number of illegal medals stored in the medal storage box 194 (storage unit) is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (second threshold). The process ends.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the medal management computer 550 that has received a notification from the medal lending machine 100 (control unit 181) notifying that the number of illegal medals stored is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (second threshold value) Display the processing (illegal medal) screen. On the business end processing (illegal medal) screen, the machine ID of the corresponding slot machine 1 is displayed together with the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 whose stored number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (second threshold). The store clerk can specify the medal lending machine 100 that collects illegal medals based on this business end processing (illegal medal) screen.

  FIG. 40 is a display screen diagram illustrating an example of a menu screen displayed on the display 123 of the medal lending machine 100. Referring to FIG. 40, the menu screen includes a “remaining amount withdrawal” button, an “insert after card” button, a “small amount lending” button, a “card lock” button, a “mob ball split” button, and an “information inquiry”. A button is displayed.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the processing content of the touch panel operation processing executed in the medal lending machine 100. This touch panel operation process is a process executed in step Sb27 of the process described with reference to FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 41, first, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the operation of the “remaining amount withdrawal” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 is detected on the touch panel 124 (step). Sg1). If it is determined that the “remaining amount withdrawal” button has been operated (YES in step Sg1), the CPU 181a executes remaining amount withdrawal processing (step Sg11).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the remaining amount extraction processing executed in the medal lending machine 100. Referring to FIG. 42, first, the CPU 181a invalidates the operation of the lending button 116 (step Sh1).

  As a result, it is necessary to operate the return button 114 after this, but the loan button 116 is erroneously operated, and medals are lent out using the deposit amount that is to be taken out now. Can be prevented. Further, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation caused by the close positions of the return button 114 and the lending button 116.

  Next, the CPU 181a refers to the card table of FIG. 20A to determine whether or not there is a prepaid balance (payment balance) (step Sh2). If it is determined that there is no payment (NO in step Sh2), the remaining payment cannot be taken out, so the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 that there is no remaining payment and the withdrawal of the remaining payment is to be stopped (step). Sh3). Thereafter, the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sh19.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a deposit remaining amount (YES in step Sh2), the CPU 181a determines whether or not there is a medal (step Sh4). If it is determined that there is no (NO in step Sh4), there is no need to issue a card for possession medal even if the remaining deposit amount is taken out. The information is displayed on the device 123 and notified (step Sh5). Thereafter, the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sh19.

  If it is determined that there are medals (YES in step Sh4), the CPU 181a executes the same processing as in steps Sm21 to Sm23 in FIG. 33 (steps Sh21 to Sh23). If it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sh22), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sh23). Thereafter, the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sh19.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 181a determines that the card lock function is invalid or has been matched by collation of the personal identification number (YES in step Sh22), the CPU 181a controls to display on the liquid crystal display 123 that the return button 114 is operated. (Step Sh6).

  In the remaining amount withdrawal process, even if the card lock function is valid, the password is not verified. If the card lock function is valid, the process cannot proceed to step Sh6 and the card lock function is invalidated. Only in the case where it is determined that it is determined, the process may proceed to step Sh6 and subsequent steps. In other words, the remaining amount may not be taken out unless the card lock function is disabled in advance.

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the return button 114 has been operated (step Sh7). When determining that there is no operation (NO in step Sh7), the CPU 181a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed (step Sh8). This predetermined time is set to be shorter than the time-out time for the input operation of the ball splitting process in step Sg15 of FIG. 41 described later. Thereby, the time when a game is not performed can be shortened as much as possible. If it has not elapsed (if NO is determined in step Sh8), the processes in steps Sh7 and Sh8 are repeated.

  If it is determined that the predetermined time has passed without the return button 114 being operated (YES in step Sh8), the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 that the withdrawal of the remaining amount of money is to be stopped due to the time being over. (Step Sh9). Thereafter, the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sh19.

  If it is determined that the return button 114 has been operated before the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step Sh7), the CPU 181a determines whether the member card is being received (step Sh11).

  If it is determined that the member card is being accepted (YES in step Sh11), the CPU 181a transmits to the card management computer 500 that the card is a deposit balance corresponding card and the deposit balance.

  In the card management computer 500, as shown in FIG. 22A, the prepaid balance corresponding to the card ID of the card in the member card table is updated to the received deposit balance, and the deposit balance correspondence flag is turned on. Change to (value "1").

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the membership card is not being accepted, that is, the visitor card is being accepted (NO in step Sh11), the CPU 181a informs the card management computer 500 that the card is a deposit-amount-compatible card and the deposit balance. The information is transmitted for registration, and the information is recorded on the visitor card (step Sh13).

  In the card management computer 500, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the prepaid balance corresponding to the card ID of the card in the visitor card table is updated to the received deposit balance, and the deposit balance correspondence flag is turned on. Change to (value "1").

  After Step Sh12 and Step Sh13, the CPU 181a causes the RAM 181b to store the card ID of the deposit remaining amount correspondence card (Step Sh14). Next, the CPU 181a controls the card reader / writer 187 to discharge the member card or the visitor card that is being accepted as a deposit remaining amount correspondence card (step Sh15). Next, the CPU 181a turns on a remaining amount discharge flag indicating that the deposit remaining amount correspondence card has been discharged (step Sh16).

  Then, the CPU 181a deletes the deposit remaining amount stored in the RAM 181b (step Sh17). Next, since the CPU 181a has a medal number, the card ID is assigned to the medal management computer 550 in order to move the visitor card stored in the card reader / writer 187 to the read / write position and perform the issuing process. If it can be issued, the number of medals and the card ID are transmitted to the medal management computer 550, and the number of medals is recorded on the visitor card (step Sh18).

  In step Sh19, the CPU 181a validates the operation of the lending button 116. Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 that is the caller of the remaining amount withdrawal process.

  As described above, the remaining amount of medals remains in the medal lending machine 100 only by operating the “remaining amount withdrawal” button in step Sg1 in FIG. 41 and the return button 114 in step Sh7 in FIG. Can be discharged. In the case of holding ball split or prepaid balance split, which will be described later, in addition to the operation for instructing the split, an operation for specifying the quantity to be split must be performed. As a result, when the remaining amount is discharged with the number of medals remaining, it is possible to perform a simple operation without requiring a complicated operation of specifying the quantity.

  Returning to FIG. 41, when it is determined that the “remaining amount withdrawal” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg1), the CPU 181a operates the “insert after card” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 with the touch panel 124. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step Sg2). When determining that the “insert after card” button has been operated (YES in step Sg2), the CPU 181a executes post-card insertion processing (step Sg12).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the post-card insertion processing executed in the medal lending machine 100. Referring to FIG. 43, first, CPU 181a determines whether or not a member card is being accepted (step Sj1). If it is determined that the membership card is being accepted (YES in step Sj1), the CPU 181a displays on the liquid crystal display 123 that the acceptance of the operation of the post-card insertion button is stopped because the membership card is being accepted. Notification is made (step Sj2). Thereafter, the process to be executed is returned to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 which is the caller of the post-card insertion process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the membership card is not being accepted (NO in step Sj1), the CPU 181a determines whether or not there are counted medals stored in the RAM 181b (step Sj3). If it is determined that there are no medals (NO in step Sj3), the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 that there is no medals and the acceptance of the post-card insertion button operation is stopped (step Sj4). ). Thereafter, the process to be executed is returned to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 which is the caller of the post-card insertion process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there are medals (YES in step Sj3), processing similar to that in steps Sm21 to Sm23 in FIG. 33 is executed (steps Sj21 to Sj23). If it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sj22), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sj23). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 which is the calling source of the post-card insertion process.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 181a determines that the card lock function is invalid or has been matched by collation of the password (YES in step Sj22), the CPU 181a changes the visitor card at the reading position of the card reader / writer 187 to invalid, Return to the card storage unit (step Sj5). Then, the CPU 181a displays on the liquid crystal display 123 that a membership card or a visitor card is to be inserted (step Sj6).

  Next, the CPU 181a determines whether or not a card has been received (step Sj7). When determining that it has not been received (NO in step Sj7), the CPU 181a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed (step Sj8). If it has not elapsed (if NO is determined in step Sj8), the processes in steps Sj7 and Sj8 are repeated.

  If the CPU 181a determines that the predetermined time has passed without accepting the card (YES in step Sj8), the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 that the insertion after the card is canceled due to the time being over (step). Sj9). Thereafter, the process to be executed is returned to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 which is the caller of the post-card insertion process.

  If it is determined that the card has been received before the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step Sj7), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the remaining amount discharge flag stored in the RAM 181b is in an on state (step Sj11). .

  When it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is on (YES in step Sj11), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the accepted card is a deposit remaining amount correspondence card (step Sj12). Whether or not the card is a deposit remaining amount correspondence card is determined by inquiring the card management computer 500 and confirming whether or not the deposit amount correspondence flag of the member card table or the visitor card table described in FIG. 22 is on. Is done.

  If the CPU 181a determines that the card is a deposit-amount-compatible card (YES in step Sj12), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the card ID of the received card matches the card ID of the deposit-amount-compatible card stored in the RAM 181b. (Step Sj13).

  If it is determined that the card ID of the reception card matches that stored (YES in step Sj13), the CPU 181a stores the remaining balance corresponding flag stored in the card management computer 500 and the card in the case of a visitor card. The recorded deposit balance correspondence flag is turned off (step Sj14).

  It should be noted that even when the deposit remaining amount correspondence flag is turned off, the history that the deposit remaining amount correspondence flag is turned on or off may be stored. Thereby, it is possible to grasp how many times the “remaining amount withdrawal” operation is performed for the card during a predetermined period (a specific day or a certain period).

  Then, the CPU 181a turns off the remaining amount discharge flag stored in the RAM 181b, and deletes the card ID of the deposit remaining amount corresponding card (step Sj15).

  After step Sj15 and when it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is not on (NO in step Sj11), the CPU 181a stores the number of medals held in the card table in FIG. 20A of the RAM 181b of the medal lending machine 100. Is registered in the member saving management table or visitor saving management table of FIG. 24 in association with the card ID of the received card, and information such as the card ID and the number of medals is sent to the medal management computer 550 and received. If the received card is a visitor card, the number of medals held is recorded in the visitor card (step Sj16).

  In addition, the setting and processing of the specific function of the previous card returned to the card storage unit are transferred to the received card (step Sj20).

  Specifically, if the specific function is a card lock function, the card lock valid flag of the previous card is transferred to the subsequent card, and if the received card is not a membership card, the password of the previous card is Let the number be transferred to a later card.

  When the specific function is the theft card restriction function, the theft card flag of the previous card is transferred to the subsequent card. If the specific function is a small-scale lending function, the small card lending valid flag of the previous card is transferred to the subsequent card.

  When the specific function is the game history totaling function, the history totaling process executed on the previous card is handed over to the subsequent card. That is, the number of big hits and the number of ARTs, which are the game histories accumulated in the history aggregation process, are taken over. In this takeover, for example, when a card is inserted later in the middle of the big hit gaming state and the ART state, the number of the gaming state in the middle is not double counted.

  This history tabulation process is managed by a management device such as the medal management computer 500. That is, the number of jackpots is stored in the member saving management table and the visitor saving management table of FIG. 24 of the medal management computer 500. Then, when a history totaling process executed for the previous card is taken over by the later card, the management device such as the medal management computer 500 stores the number of jackpots in association with the card ID of the later card. By doing so, it is managed that the process in which the function for the previous card is executed is taken over for the subsequent card.

  If the specific function is the possession ball payout function, the possession ball payout process executed on the previous card is taken over. For example, in accordance with the operation of the replay button 121, when the ball payout process for returning the possessed medals or the saving medals is executed, the number of possessed medals and the saving medals satisfies the number corresponding to the lending unit amount. If there is not enough possession medals and saving medals in the subsequent card, the post-card insertion process is executed if there is not, and if there is a shortage of medal and saving medals, the lending unit amount summed up with the previous card and the subsequent card Held medals and saving medals are paid out.

  After step Sj20, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 that is the caller of the post-card insertion process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card is not a deposit remaining amount corresponding card (NO in step Sj12) or does not match the stored card ID (NO in step Sj13), the received card corresponds to the correct deposit remaining amount. The fact that it is not a card is displayed and notified on the liquid crystal display 123 (step Sj17). Then, the fact that an error has occurred is notified by the liquid crystal display 123 and the speaker (step Sj18).

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not an error reset operation has been performed by the store clerk (step Sj19). When determining that the reset operation has been performed (step Sj19), the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 that is the caller of the post-card insertion process. Thereby, the store clerk can cope with the situation where a player may illegally acquire a medal.

  In the post-card insertion process shown in FIG. 43, when there are medals, the process of associating the medals with the card inserted later is performed. On the other hand, when there are no medals, even if there is a prepaid balance, the process of associating the prepaid balance with a card inserted later is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when there are no medals, if there is a prepaid balance, a process for associating the prepaid balance with a card inserted later may be performed.

  Returning to FIG. 41, if it is determined that the “insert after card” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg 2), the CPU 181 a operates the touch panel 124 to operate the “small amount lending” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step Sg3). If it is determined that the “small amount lending” button has been operated (YES in step Sg3), the CPU 181a executes a small amount lending process (step Sg13).

  In the small amount lending process, a medal of a smaller amount than the number of medals lent out by operating the normal lending button 116 is lent. For example, normally, medals M (for example, 50) corresponding to 1,000 yen are lent out, but in the small amount lent processing executed by operating the “small amount lending” button, medals M (for example, 200 yen) (for example, 10) are lent out. In this small amount lending process, the rented amount may be set in advance by the store clerk or may be set by the player.

  Further, in the small amount lending process, only the lending amount is set to be smaller than usual. After the small amount lending process is executed, the lending button 116 is operated so that a small amount of medals can be lent. Good. In this case, the loan amount may be returned to the normal amount by executing a small amount loan process next. This makes it possible to borrow a small amount while avoiding a wasteful amount such as borrowing up to a normal amount in the case where a small amount of medals is found due to the big hit.

  Similarly to the lending process in step Sb21 of FIG. 30 described above, even when the number of held balls and the number of stored balls are displayed on the liquid crystal display 123, the small-scale lending process is not disabled. Specifically, the process of step Sg13 is executed regardless of whether the ball information display flag is on or off.

  If it is determined that the “small amount lending” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg3), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the operation of the “card lock” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 has been detected on the touch panel 124. (Step Sg4). When determining that the “card lock” button has been operated (YES in step Sg4), the CPU 181a executes a card lock process (step Sg14).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the card lock processing executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 44, in the card lock process, the accepted card is locked so that it cannot be returned only by operating return button 114. Specifically, a password is set. Thus, when the return button 114 is operated, the password is requested to be input, and when the correct password is input, the accepted card is ejected. Further, in the card lock process, when the identification information of the portable terminal is received from the portable terminal incorporating the non-contact IC chip, the card is locked and the return button 114 is operated. If the identification information is accepted, the accepted card may be ejected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the accepted card from being stolen.

  First, the same processing as Step Sm21 to Step Sm23 of FIG. 33 is executed (Step Sq1 to Step Sq3). If it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sq2), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sq3). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 that is the caller of this card lock process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card lock function is invalid or matched by the collation of the personal identification number (YES in step Sq2), the CPU 181a determines whether the member card is being accepted (step Sq4).

  If it is determined that the membership card is being accepted (YES in step Sq4), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to display a message confirming whether the card can be locked (step Sq5). Then, it is determined whether or not the selection of whether or not to lock the card is “YES” (step Sq6). When determining that the selection is not “YES” (NO in step Sq6), the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 that is the caller of the card lock process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the selection is “YES” (YES in step Sq6), the CPU 181a turns on the card lock valid flag of the card in the card table of FIG. 20A (step Sq7) and validates it. To the card management computer 500 (step Sq8). With this reception, the CPU 502 of the card management computer 500 turns on the card lock valid flag of the member card table or visitor card table of FIG. Thereafter, the CPU 181a of the medal lending machine 100 returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 that is the caller of the card lock process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the membership card is not being accepted (NO in step Sq4), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the visitor card is being accepted (step Sq11). When determining that the visitor card is not being received (NO in step Sq11), the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 that is the caller of the card lock process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the visitor card is being received (YES in step Sq11), the CPU 181a changes the lock method to a method using a personal identification number or a method using a portable terminal incorporating a non-contact IC chip. The liquid crystal display 123 is controlled so as to display that it is to be selected (step Sq12).

  First, the CPU 181a determines whether or not a method using a personal identification number has been selected (step Sq13). When determining that it is not selected (NO in step Sq13), the CPU 181a determines whether or not a portable terminal incorporating a non-contact IC chip is detected (step Sq14). When determining that it has not been detected (NO in step Sq14), the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to step Sq13.

  When determining that the mobile terminal is detected (YES in step Sq14), the CPU 181a acquires the terminal ID of the mobile terminal from the non-contact IC chip of the mobile terminal (step Sq15). Then, the CPU 181a turns on the card lock validity flag of the card in the card table of FIG. 20 (a), stores the acquired terminal ID as a personal identification number (step Sq16), and indicates that it has been activated and the acquired terminal ID. The data is transmitted to the card management computer 500 (step Sq17). With this reception, the CPU 502 of the card management computer 500 turns on the card lock valid flag of the member card table or visitor card table of FIG. 22 and stores the terminal ID as a personal identification number. Thereafter, the CPU 181a of the medal lending machine 100 returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 that is the caller of the card lock process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the method using the password is selected as the lock method (YES in step Sq13), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to display the password input screen (step Sq21). Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not a personal identification number has been input (step Sq22). When determining that it has not been input (NO in step Sq22), CPU 181a repeats the process of step Sq22.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a password has been input (YES in step Sq22), the CPU 181a turns on the card lock valid flag of the card in the card table of FIG. 20A, and stores the input password. (Step Sq23), the fact that it has been validated and the input personal identification number are transmitted to the card management computer 500 (Step Sq24). With this reception, the CPU 502 of the card management computer 500 turns on the card lock valid flag of the member card table or visitor card table of FIG. 22 and stores the password. Thereafter, the CPU 181a of the medal lending machine 100 returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 that is the caller of the card lock process.

  When the card lock function is enabled, it is preferable to display a display (for example, a symbol) indicating that the card lock function is enabled on the display 123. Thereby, the player can recognize that the card lock function is effective.

  Returning to FIG. 41, when determining that the “card lock” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg4), the CPU 181a operates the touch panel 124 to operate the “divide ball” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step Sg5). When determining that the “divide ball” button has been operated (YES in step Sg5), the CPU 181a executes a ball division process (step Sg15).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the coin splitting process executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 45, in the possession ball dividing process, the number of medals designated by the player out of the current number of medals or the number of saved medals is divided by associating it with another visitor card. The number of medals to be divided may be designated as a numerical value or selectable from choices.

  First, the same processing as Step Sm21 to Step Sm23 of FIG. 33 is executed (Step Sr1 to Step Sr3). When it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sr2), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sr3). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 that is the caller of this card lock process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card lock function is invalid or matched by the collation of the passwords (YES in step Sr2), the CPU 181a determines whether the number of medals is more than twice the number corresponding to the lending unit amount. It is determined whether or not (step Sr11). When the number of medals is less than the number corresponding to the lending unit amount, usually the medals cannot be paid out. It is necessary to be at least twice the number corresponding to.

  If it is determined that the number of medals is not more than twice the number corresponding to the lending unit amount (NO in step Sr11), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the number of medals is insufficient ( Step Sr12).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number is twice or more (YES in step Sr11), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to display a screen for inputting the number of medals to be divided (step Sr13). The number of divisions may be selectable from options, or may be input by increasing or decreasing the number of units corresponding to the lending unit amount by operating the increase or decrease button, or a numerical value can be directly input. You may do it. Then, it is determined whether or not the division number has been input (step Sr14). When determining that the division number has not been input (NO in step Sr14), the CPU 181a repeats the process of step Sr14.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of divisions has been input (YES in step Sr14), the CPU 181a determines whether the member card is being accepted (step Sr21). When determining that the membership card is being accepted (YES in step Sr21), the CPU 181a subtracts the number of divisions from the number of medals and transmits the number of medals after the subtraction to the medal management computer 550 (step Sr22). The medal management computer 550 updates the number of medals held in the member saving management table of FIG. Next, the CPU 181a controls the card reader / writer 187 to discharge the member card (step Sr23).

  Next, the CPU 181a takes out the visitor card from the card storage unit of the card reader / writer 187 to the reading position, and performs a process for issuing the taken-out visitor card (step Sr24). Specifically, the status of the visitor card table of the card management computer 500 is changed during use, the latest issue date is updated, the latest issue date of the visitor saving management table of the medal management computer 550 is updated, and both tables are updated. Reset other items in.

  Then, the CPU 181a associates the visitor card with the number of divisions as the number of medals (step Sr25). Specifically, the division number is stored as the number of medals held in the card table of the medal lending machine 100, and the division number is stored as the number of medals held in the visitor saving management table of the medal management computer 550. Next, the CPU 181a controls the card reader / writer 187 so as to eject the visitor card (step Sr26).

  Next, the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 so as to notify the user that the re-insertion of the previously ejected member card is urged (step Sr27). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 that is the caller of this card lock process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the membership card is not being accepted (NO in step Sr21), the CPU 181a stores the card information stored in the card table in FIG. Retreat to the area (step Sr31).

  Then, the CPU 181a resets the card information of the visitor card at the reading / writing position being accepted, and performs the issuing process as described in step Sr24 (step Sr32). Next, as in step Sr25, the CPU 181a associates the number of medals with the visitor card as the number of medals (step Sr33), and controls the card reader / writer 187 to eject the visitor card (step Sr34).

  Next, as in step Sr24, the CPU 181a takes out the visitor card from the card storage unit of the card reader / writer 187 to the reading position, and performs the process of issuing the taken-out visitor card (step Sr35). Then, the CPU 181a associates the card information saved in step Sr31 with the visitor card (step Sr36). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 41 that is the caller of this card lock process.

  If it is determined that the “divide ball” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg5), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the operation of the “information inquiry” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 has been detected on the touch panel 124. Judgment is made (step Sg6). If it is determined that the “information inquiry” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg6), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the ball information display flag is in an on state, that is, the ball / spot information screen shown in FIG. Is determined (step Sg7). When it is determined that the “information inquiry” button has been operated (YES in step Sg6) or the ball information display flag is on (YES in step Sg7), the CPU 181a executes an information inquiry process (step Sg16).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the contents of the information inquiry process executed in the medal lending machine 100. Referring to FIG. 46, first, the PCU 181a of the control unit 181 determines whether or not the ball information display flag is in an on state, that is, whether or not the ball-and-ball information screen of FIG. 47 is being displayed. (Step St1).

  When it is determined that the ball information display flag is not in the on state (NO in step St1), the CPU 181a displays the number of held balls and the number of stored balls by rate acquired from the medal management computer 550 and stored in the memory when the card is received. Control is performed so that the image is displayed on 123 (step St2). The rate is the unit price required for lending one medal or one pachinko ball. For example, one pachinko ball, one yen, two yen, one four yen, and one medal, five yen, One sheet is 20 yen.

  Here, all types of game media and the number of possessed balls and the number of stored balls for all unit prices are received from the medal management computer 550 in step Sn7 of the card receiving process of FIG. 31 executed in step Sb20 of FIG. It is assumed that it is stored in

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and all types of game media and the number of possessed balls and the number of accumulated balls for all unit prices may be acquired from the medal management computer 550 when the processing of step St2 is executed. In that case, in step Sn7 of FIG. 31, only the number of possessed balls and the number of accumulated balls related to the type and unit price of the game medium handled by the medal lending machine 100 are acquired. Further, the ball information display flag may be turned on on condition that all types of game media and the number of possessed balls and the number of stored balls are acquired from the medal management computer 550. Further, it may be at least one of the number of possessed balls and the number of stored balls, or some types.

  Below that, there are pachinko balls 1 yen 4 yen, pachinko balls 1 yen 1 yen, 1 medal 5 yen (4 pachis, 1 each in the figure), which are rates lent by other medal lending machines 100 and card units. The number of pachinko balls or medal holding balls and storage balls of a pachi and 5 slots) is displayed.

  In the lower right part, a “return” button for returning the display screen to the main menu screen is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 46, after step St2, the CPU 181a changes the ball information display flag to the on state (step St3), and starts measuring the display time (step St4).

  When it is determined that the ball information display flag is on (YES in step St1), and after step St4, the CPU 181a starts displaying the holding ball / stored ball information screen for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute). ), It is determined whether or not it has passed (step St5). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step St5), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the “return” button has been operated on the possessed / sold ball information screen (step St6).

  When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed from the display (step St5) or the “return” button has been operated (step St6), the CPU 181a turns off the ball information display flag (step St7), and FIG. The main menu screen shown is controlled to be displayed on the display 123 (step St8).

  If it is determined that the “return” button has not been operated (NO in step St6), and after step St8, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  In the information inquiry process, in addition to the number of medals and the number of saved medals, the prepaid balance (payment balance), the medal management computer 550, the hall computer 540, and the card management computer according to the player's operation. Other information managed at 500 may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 123.

  When it is determined that the ball information display flag is not in the ON state (NO in step Sg7) and after step Sg11 to step Sg16, CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the process of FIG.

  In the medal lending machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a portable terminal with a built-in non-contact IC chip can be accepted. Even when the membership card or the visitor card is being received, if the portable terminal is held over the chip reader / writer of the medal lending machine 100, the medal lending machine 100 will hold the coin corresponding to the card ID stored in the portable terminal or The stored balls are subtracted and medals are paid out. Then, as described above, when the holding balls and storage balls corresponding to the card are disabled, the holding balls and storage balls corresponding to the portable terminal are also disabled.

  When the member exchange card or the visitor card is received at the gift exchange POS 570, the medal management number and the saving medal number associated with the card are inquired to the medal management computer 550, and all or one of the medal number and the saving medal number are inquired. A process for exchanging the value of the department for a prize is performed. Specifically, the number of medals or the number of saved medals is subtracted according to the value of the prize to be exchanged. At this time, if the card lock function for the card is valid, the player is required to input a personal identification number.

  In this gift exchange POS 570, if a possessed medal compatible card is accepted, and if the retained medal compatible card is discharged, there should be a deposit remaining amount corresponding card, so the presence of a remaining deposit supported card is notified ( Here, display on the display unit of the gift exchange POS 570 to that effect and output of sound).

  There are many cases where time elapses after the deposit-corresponding card is discharged and before the possession medal-compatible card is discharged. For this reason, when exchanging medals or saving medals for prizes, it is possible to alert the player to the settlement of the remaining amount specified by the deposit remaining amount correspondence card. As a result, forgetting to settle the remaining amount can be prevented.

  When the member card or the visitor card is received in the checkout device 580, the prepaid balance associated with the card is inquired to the card management computer 500, and a process for paying the prepaid balance into money is performed. At this time, if the card lock function for the card is valid, the player is required to input a personal identification number.

  In this settlement apparatus 580, if a card with a deposit remaining amount is accepted, there may be a card with a corresponding medal corresponding to the card with a deposit remaining amount. Then, it is notified that there may be a card with medals (in this case, display on the display unit of the settlement apparatus 580 and output of sound).

  There are cases where two cards, that is, a card corresponding to the deposit remaining amount and a card corresponding to a medal are discharged. For this reason, when paying out the remaining amount specified by the deposit remaining amount correspondence card, it is possible to alert the player to exchange medals of the number of medals specified by the possession medal correspondence card for prizes. As a result, forgetting to exchange prizes can be prevented.

  As described above, in the medal lending machine 100 (game device) according to the embodiment of the present invention, when the illegal medal (unsuitable game medium) reaches the full tank (first storage amount). By notifying that effect, it is possible to collect illegal medals from the medal storage box 194 (storage unit), and at least when the predetermined number (second storage amount) has been reached at the end of the game hall business. By notifying that fact, it is possible not only to collect illegal medals before the tank is full, but also to eliminate the need to collect medals from the storage section that still has room for storage. Is improved. Therefore, since the amount of medals stored during business hours is prevented from reaching a full tank, it is possible to prevent illegal medals from being collected from the medal storage box 194 (storage section) that has reached the full tank and circulating. it can.

  Specifically, when a large number (for example, 1000) of medal lending machines 100 are installed in the amusement hall, all medal lending machines are periodically updated unless the medal storage amount in the medal storage box 194 is notified. Although it is necessary to check the 100 medal storage boxes 194 and turn around, for example, the medal lending machine 100 in which only about one or two medals are stored in the medal storage box 194 is also checked. Although it takes a lot of trouble, it is possible to efficiently collect illegal medals by notifying that effect when the predetermined number is reached.

  In addition, when an illegal medal reaches a full tank (first storage amount), even if it is in business, it can be promptly collected by notifying that fact, so that the medal is left as it is full. It is prevented from being discharged and circulated within the amusement island.

  In addition, when the predetermined number (second storage amount) has been reached at least at the end of the game hall business, the fact is notified so that illegal medals can be collected before the tank is full. Since it can be avoided as much as possible that a small amount of illegal medals is stored during business, it is possible to prevent annoying the player when collecting illegal medals during business.

  In addition, the controller 190a of the counting device 190 receives a plurality of types of illegal medals that are determined to be inappropriate and include a local medal that can be used in the game hall and a fake medal that cannot be used in the game hall. The self-stored medal is registered in the memory 190b by having about 100 self-stored medals inserted in the counting device 190 in advance. Then, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the total number of medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) in Se4 of the medal storage process in FIG. 38, and in the medal storage process Se5 in FIG. If it is the own store medal, the process proceeds to Se6 to add 1 to the own store medal storage number of the medal information (see FIG. 20C), and if it is not the own store medal, Se11 And by adding 1 to the number of false medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 20C), how many of the illegal medals stored in the medal storage box 194 are own medals. It becomes possible to return to the area | region which collect | recovers at an early stage and is determined as an appropriate medal.

  Also, when the control unit 181 determines that the counted medals are not appropriate, in Sd3 of the illegal medal processing of FIG. 37, the player's face image and the medal image are combined in parallel to form one notification image ( 29) and the notification image is stored in the RAM 181b, so that it is possible to identify which one of the medals stored in the medal storage box 194 is used by the predetermined player. It becomes easier to identify fraud.

  Note that in Sd3 of the illegal medal process in FIG. 37, the player's face image and the medal image are combined in parallel to generate one notification image (see FIG. 29). It is not always necessary to generate a notification image. For example, an ID is assigned to each of the face image and the medal image, and the face image and the medal image are separately transmitted to the medal management computer 550, and the medal management computer 550 The IDs of the images may be stored in association with each other.

  In addition, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the counted medal is an illegal medal based on the medal determination information acquired from the counting device 190 in Sc6 of the counting process in FIG. On the condition that the condition is satisfied, the number of illegal medals determined to be inappropriate among the number of medals counted until the inappropriate condition is satisfied is invalidated (for example, in Sd8 of the illegal medal process in FIG. 37). The control unit 181 subtracts the value of the cumulative illegal medal number from the medal number of the card table (see FIG. 20 (a)), so that the medal paid out from the slot machine 1 and counted is not appropriate. If the improper condition is not satisfied, the improper medals will be counted, so that a player who uses an illegal medal unintentionally suffers a disadvantage. It with be prevented, if the improper condition is satisfied, since the number of medals counted so far becomes invalid, it is possible to prevent unauthorized medal is acquired.

  In addition, in Sd6 of the illegal medal process of FIG. 37, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information (see FIG. 20B), and the card acceptance process of Sb20 of FIG. , The number of medals held, the number of saved medals (member only), the point of visit (member only), and the personal identification number (member only) included in the received acceptance processing completion notification are stored in the card table. On the other hand, in the return process of Sb23 in FIG. 30, it is determined whether or not the card being received is a visitor card. If the card is a visitor card, accumulation of game information being received on the card table is stored in the visitor card. In addition to recording the number of illegal medals and recording the information on a card and ejecting it, information that can identify the number of medals stored in the medal storage box 194 is recorded. It is possible to grasp and manage how many medals were counted by a person.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the case where the invention is applied to the medal lending machine 100 provided corresponding to the slot machine 1 has been described. In the second embodiment, a case where the invention is applied to a card unit 750 provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 701 will be described.

  FIG. 48 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine 701 and a card unit 750 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the card unit 750.

  The pachinko gaming machine 701 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 701 has a glass door frame 702 formed in a frame shape that can be opened and closed in the game frame. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. And the board 706).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 702 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 703, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 704 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 703, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 705 for firing the hitting ball, and the like. A game board 706 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 702. The game board 706 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 706 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 707 is formed on the front surface of the game board 706 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member forming the extra ball tray (lower tray) 704 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position (for example, the central portion of the lower tray) on the upper surface of the lower tray body, for example, A stick controller 7122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right) is attached. Note that the stick controller 7122 has a predetermined controller finger, for example, by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 7122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 7125 (see FIG. 49) that can be instructed is provided. The stick controller 7122 incorporates a vibrator motor 7126 (see FIG. 49) for causing the stick controller 7122 to vibrate.

  A member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 703 is operated by a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by, for example, pressing a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 7122). A possible push button 7120 is provided.

  On the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray 703, a ball lending button 751 that is operated when lending a ball, a return button 752 that is operated when a card is returned by specifying the remaining amount of the card, the number of balls acquired, etc., and a card A remaining frequency display portion 753 for displaying the remaining frequency is provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 707, there is provided an effect display device 709 capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. On the right side of the effect display device 709 in the game area 707, a first special symbol display 708a that variably displays a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each, and a plurality of types that can identify each of them. And a second special symbol display 708b for variably displaying the second special symbol as the identification information.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 708a and the second special symbol display device 708b is configured by a simple and small display device (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 709 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and displays various images such as a change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the display screen. An area is provided. In such a display area, for example, a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative (for presentation) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is formed.

  Each of the first special symbol display 708a and the second special symbol display 708b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on the main board (game control board). The effect display device 709 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 708a, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 709 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 708b performs the second display. When the special symbol variation display is executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 709 along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  When the jackpot display result (bonus symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a, or the jackpot display result (jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 708b. When the derivation display is performed, the effect display device 709 also derives and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbol) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this manner, the specific game state (big hit game state) is controlled as an advantageous state to which a value (advantageous value) advantageous to the player is given.

  Further, in the effect display device 709, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) It is stopped, swinging, enlarged, reduced, or deformed in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols may fluctuate in synchronization with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol may be switched. An effect that is performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 709 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the change of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, color etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 709 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

  On the right side of the effect display device 709, a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 708a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information that can identify each of them is provided. The first special symbol display 708a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying special symbols such as numbers 0 to 9. In addition, on the right side of the effect display device 709 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 708a), a second special symbol display (second display) that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information that can identify each of them. Fluctuation display portion) 708b is provided. The second special symbol display 708b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying special symbols such as numbers 0 to 9.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 708a and the second special symbol indicator 708b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 708a and 708b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 713 or the second start winning opening) After passing 714 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) Is started and a big hit game is not executed), and when a variable display time (variable time) elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 713 is provided below the effect display device 709. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 713 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the first start opening switch 713a.

  A variable winning ball device 715 having a second starting winning port 714 through which a game ball can be won is provided below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 713. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 714 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the second start opening switch 714a. The variable winning ball device 715 is opened by a solenoid 716. When the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second start winning port 714 (it is easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 714 than the first starting winning port 713. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 714. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 713 than the second starting winning port 714. Note that, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win). Hereinafter, the first start winning port 713 and the second start winning port 714 may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  Above the second special symbol display 708b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 718b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 714, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 718b increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 708b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, further above the second special symbol hold memory display 718b, the number of valid winning balls entered into the first start winning opening 713, that is, the first reserved memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 718a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 718a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 708a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating a hitting operation handle 705 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the game area 707. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 707 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 707, and then descends the game area 707. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 713 and is detected by the first start port switch 713a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 708a starts the first special symbol variation display (variation), and the effect display device 709 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 713. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 714 and is detected by the second start port switch 714a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 708b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. In other words, the variation display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 714. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 709 is used for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 708a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 708b. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 708b, the effect display device 709 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 709, a first reserved memory display unit for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit for displaying the second reserved memory number are formed. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display unit for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 720 is provided below the variable winning ball device 715. The special variable winning ball apparatus 720 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 708b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 721 in a specific game state (a big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected by a count switch 723.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball device 720 is opened is called a round. Thus, the repeated continuation control is also called round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided. When it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 709, there is provided a normal symbol display 710 that variably displays normal symbols that can be distinguished from each other. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 710 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) that can display numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. That is, the normal symbol display 710 is configured to display the numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9 in a variable manner. The small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 732 and is detected by the gate switch 732a, the display variation display of the normal symbol display 710 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 710 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is closed in a disadvantageous state for a player for a predetermined number of times. To an open state advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 710, a normal symbol holding storage display 741 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 732 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 732, that is, each time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 732a, the normal symbol hold storage display 741 increments the LED to be lit by one. Then, each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 710 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  At the bottom of the game board 706, there is an out port 726 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. Also, four speakers 727 that emit sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper and lower left and outer sides outside the game area 707. A frame LED 728 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 707.

  In addition, a card unit 750 that enables lending of a ball by inserting a card (member card, visitor card) is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 701. The card unit 750 is a card that records the card remaining amount and the number of balls acquired from a card that records the remaining amount of the card as a value that can be used for the game by the player and the number of balls acquired as a value acquired by the player as a result of the game. Upon accepting the withdrawal, a control signal is output to the withdrawal control board 737 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 to instruct the ball dispensing device 797 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 to pay out a pachinko ball as a lending ball corresponding to the withdrawal amount. By using the pachinko ball, the player can play a game with the pachinko gaming machine 701. Thus, the control signal output from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701 is an example of a pachinko ball lending command based on the value recorded on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to signals exchanged between the card unit 750 and a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 701. When the card unit is built in the gaming machine, the lending command is exchanged inside the gaming machine. It may be a control signal.

  The card unit 750 includes, for example, a usable display lamp indicating whether or not the card unit 750 is in a usable state, a connecting table direction indicator indicating which side of the pachinko gaming machine 701 corresponds to the card unit, and a card unit. When checking the card insertion indicator lamp indicating that a card is inserted in the card, the card insertion slot into which the card as a recording medium is inserted, and the card reader / writer mechanism provided on the back of the card insertion slot A card unit lock for releasing the card unit is provided.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 701, when a player plays a game, a game card that can be used for the game is used. There are two types of cards: a membership card issued individually to a player registered as a member in a game hall, and a visitor card that can be used by all players.

  The membership card is a recording medium made up of an IC card. A card ID is recorded on the membership card. Various information (card information) such as a card remaining amount as a consideration for a player's input price, earned ball number information, accumulated ball number information, and member information for identifying a member individual is associated with the card ID and will be described later. Recorded on the management server. The acquired ball management server can determine various corresponding card information based on the membership card. Card information such as the remaining card amount, information on the number of stored balls, information on the number of points visited, and member information is managed by the acquired ball management server using the card ID.

  Here, the stored ball refers to an act of depositing an acquired value such as an acquired ball acquired by the player to the game hall side and the deposited value. The accumulated ball number information is information indicating the number of accumulated balls of the player who owns the member card. The earned ball refers to a value indicating the score or ball obtained by the player through the game. The acquired number-of-balls information is information indicating the number of acquired balls of the player who owns the member card. The replay means that a player plays a game by lending a ball using a stored ball or an acquired ball not deposited in a game hall.

  When a player plays a game, first, money (1000 yen) is inserted into the money insertion slot. Then, when the inserted money is discriminated and is a proper money, when the ball lending button 751 is operated, the game balls are lent out within the range of the amount of the inserted money, and a game becomes possible. Note that money other than 1000 yen bills can also be used. When the card is returned, the number of balls acquired by the player can be added to the number of balls specified by the card ID of the inserted member card. If no membership card is inserted, a visitor card is issued from the card unit 750. The number of balls acquired by the player is recorded on the visitor card and discharged to the player. In this way, the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount used for the game from the deposit amount is stored in the member card and the visitor card in an identifiable manner.

  When a player plays a game using a visitor card, the visitor card is inserted into a card slot provided in the card unit 750. Then, card information recorded on the inserted visitor card such as the remaining card amount and the number of balls acquired is read by a card reader / writer provided in the card unit 750. Then, based on the read card information, the remaining card amount is displayed on the remaining number display unit 753 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701, and the acquired number of balls is displayed on the count display unit 7555 provided in the card unit 750. Is displayed. The count display unit 7555 is configured to display the remaining card amount and the number of acquired balls with a predetermined number of digits. A game can be played using the displayed card remaining amount and the number of acquired balls.

  When a player plays a game using a membership card, the membership card is inserted into a card slot provided in the card unit 750. Then, the card ID recorded on the inserted member card is read by the card reader / writer. Then, the ball number data (acquired ball number data, accumulated ball number data) specified by the acquired ball management server based on the read card ID is displayed on the count display unit 7555. A game can be performed using the displayed card remaining amount, the number of acquired balls, and the number of stored balls.

  The card unit 750 is provided with a replay button 7554 that is operated when receiving a lend using a stored ball or an acquired ball, that is, when replaying.

  When the ball lending button 751 is operated, a predetermined lending unit amount is deducted from the remaining card amount displayed in the remaining frequency display portion 753 and reduced, and in exchange for that, a ball for the lending unit amount is deducted. Is paid out from the pachinko machine 701 as a ball. Further, the remaining card amount is displayed on the remaining frequency display portion 753. Such an operation is called a ball lending operation.

  If the replay button 7554 is operated in a state where a card is inserted in the card slot, the number of balls corresponding to the number of return units determined in advance from the number of acquired balls or the number of stored balls displayed on the counting display portion 7555. Are deducted and subtracted, and in exchange, balls for the number of return units are returned from the ball payout device 797 of the pachinko gaming machine 701. Such an operation is called a replay operation. The balls paid out in this way are called return balls.

  If the return button 752 is operated in a state where the membership card is inserted in the card slot, information such as the number of balls acquired at that time, the remaining card amount, and the number of stored balls is stored in the acquired ball number management server, The membership card in which the card ID specifying the stored information is recorded is ejected from the card slot and returned to the player.

  Balls paid out as balls for lending from the card unit 750 are paid out on a ball supply tray 703 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701 from a ball dispensing device 797 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701.

  In the game, the player operates a hitting operation handle 705 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701 to eject and fire the balls stored in the hitting ball supply tray 703 and to hit the game area 707. Then, when the balls that are driven into the game area 707 win the various winning areas as described above, a predetermined number of premium balls for each winning area are paid out to the hitting ball supply tray 703. When the hitting ball supply tray 703 becomes full, balls are sent to an excess ball receiving tray 704 provided below and stored.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 701, pachinko ball counting devices called individual counters 705 are provided corresponding to the respective pachinko gaming machines 701. Each counter 705 includes a counting ball storage 794 provided below the pachinko gaming machine 701.

  The counting ball storage unit 794 is provided below the surplus ball receiving tray 704 and has a shape capable of receiving and storing the balls discharged from the surplus ball receiving tray 704. When the discharge lever provided in the surplus ball receiving tray 704 is operated due to the storage ball becoming full or the like, the ball stored in the surplus ball receiving tray 704 is opened at the bottom of the surplus ball receiving tray 704. Is discharged downward and received by the counting ball reservoir 794.

  The counting ball storage unit 794 is provided with a counting shutter 794a that can be operated by the player. The counting shutter 794a is a member for opening and closing an opening provided at the bottom of the counting ball storage portion 794, and is opened and closed according to an operation of the integrally formed lever portion 794b. The counting shutter 794a is closed in a normal state to make the counting ball storage portion 794 ready to store balls, and is opened when the lever portion 794b is operated by the player. When the counting shutter 794 a is opened, the balls stored in the counting ball storage unit 794 are discharged to the ball discharge passage 7520 connected to the bottom of the counting ball storage unit 794. On the entry side of the ball discharge passage 7520, there is an acquisition ball detection switch 7501 comprising a passage detection sensor that detects the ball discharged from the counting ball storage unit 794 (hereinafter referred to as “acquired ball”). Is provided.

  When a ball is detected and counted by the acquired ball detection switch 7501, the count value is displayed on the count display portion 7555 provided in the card unit 750. This count value (also referred to as “acquired ball count”) is recorded on the visitor card as acquired ball count information at the end of the game, and can be used for various purposes such as prize exchange. The member card is stored in the acquired ball management server in association with the card ID of the member card, and can be used for various purposes such as prize exchange. Further, the number of acquired balls indicated by the acquired number of balls information can be converted into the number of stored balls and recorded as the number of stored balls information.

  When returning, the return button 752 is operated by the player. When the return button 752 is operated, all the count values obtained by the above-described acquired ball detection switch 7501 are settled for the exchange of prizes, and information such as the settled count value (in other words, the number of obtained balls) is stored in the card. The data is written on the visitor card by the reader / writer, and the visitor card is ejected from the card slot and returned to the player. On the other hand, when a player inserts a member card into the card slot and returns, information such as a count value (in other words, the number of balls acquired) is stored in the acquired ball management server in association with the card ID of the member card. Is done.

  Of the “big hit”, after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than the normal state (the normal gaming state (low probability state) that is not a probable change state) as a special gaming state A type of jackpot (type) that shifts to a state of probability variation (an abbreviation of probability variation state, also referred to as high probability state) is called “probability variation jackpot”.

  As the big hit gaming states with different numbers of rounds, there are provided a plurality of types of big hit gaming states such as a normal big hit and a big hit gaming state of 15 rounds with a probable big hit, and a two round big hit gaming state with a sudden probable big hit. In addition, the big hit gaming state where the number of rounds is the same, but the opening times of each round are different, the big hit gaming state with a normal big hit and a probable big hit is 29 seconds and the open time due to a sudden probable big hit is 0.5 seconds A plurality of types of big hit game states are provided. In the small hit, the small hit game state of the number of times of opening (2 times) and the opening time (0.5 seconds) is the same as the sudden probability change big hit.

  Specifically, in the big hit game state of the normal big hit and the probable big hit, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is set in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) in the open state) is set. The closed state is established in accordance with the elapse of time or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a right to continue is generated, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of releases in the big hit gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Also, in the big hit gaming state with sudden probability change big hit, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened, a predetermined open condition end condition (predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses). In other words, the closed state is established when a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls has been established. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a right to continue is generated, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the big hit gaming state reaches two rounds (final round) at which a predetermined upper limit is reached.

  As described above, the sudden probability variation jackpot is allowed up to the number of times the opening of the big winning opening is less than 15 rounds (two in this embodiment), and the opening time of the big winning opening is short (for example, 0. 0. It is a big hit type (type) for 5 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, the special game state based on the probability variation jackpot is accompanied by the probability variation state, and the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol and the production symbol is more than the non-short-time state (normal variation time state). When shortened, it is controlled to the short state. In the present embodiment, the special gaming state based on the normal jackpot is controlled to be a short time state.

  In this way, the transition time to the short-time state reduces the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol. Therefore, when the short-time state is reached, it is easy for an effective start winning to occur, and a big hit game may be performed. Rise.

  Note that the type of jackpot (type) that does not shift to the probability change state after being controlled to the 15-round jackpot gaming state among the “hits” is called “ordinary jackpot”.

  In addition, as a special game state based on the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit, the frequency of the game ball entering the variable prize ball device 715 is increased by increasing the frequency at which the variable prize ball device 715 is opened. It is controlled to an electric chew support control state that facilitates winning (higher approach, higher frequency) to the device 715. On the other hand, the special gaming state based on the sudden probability change big hit is controlled to the probability change state, but is not controlled to the electric chew support control state.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric support control, normal symbol variation time (time from the start of variation display to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol of the game will be a winning symbol (ordinary symbol probability control), control to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 715 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 715 Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is open is higher than when the control is not performed, so the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 714 is increased. As a result, the game ball becomes easier to start and win (the execution conditions for the variable display in the special symbol displays 708a and 708b and the effect display device 709 are more easily established). In addition, by increasing the winning frequency to the second starting winning port 714 by such control, a gaming state is achieved in which the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state (high frequency state) in which the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 714 is increased by such electric Chu support control is the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. Since the ratio “base” is higher than when the control is not performed, it is called “high base state”. Further, when such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Such control is control for facilitating winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 715 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball apparatus 715, that is, the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chew support control”.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the state of jackpot probability, and terms indicating a combination of base states are used. , “High base state (electric Chu support control state)” and “low base state (non-electric Chu support control state)” are used.

  Furthermore, as the electric chew support control, by shifting to a state in which any one of a normal symbol shortening control state, a normal symbol probability changing control state, an opening time extension control state, and an opening number increase control state are combined, You may make it transfer to a high base state. In addition, as the electric chew support control, by shifting to any one of the normal symbol shortening control state, the normal symbol probability changing control state, the opening time extension control state, and the opening number increasing control state, You may make it transfer to a state. As described above, as the electric chew support control, any one of a normal symbol shortening control state, a normal symbol probability changing control state, an opening time extension control state, and an opening number increasing control state, any one of a plurality (all) Any control may be performed as long as the control is performed in a combined state or a combined state.

  In the present embodiment, the special gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot is controlled to the time reduction state and the electric chew support control state accompanying the control to the probability variation state. In addition, as a relationship between the short time state and the electric chew support control state in the special game state, the electric chew support control state may be controlled in association with the short time state. You may make it control to a control state.

  In the case of this embodiment, there is a case where the special game state is not controlled to the short-time state and the electric chew support control state as the special game state after the end of the big hit game state like the sudden change big hit. In addition, after the big hit gaming state, when it is in the normal state without being controlled to the probability change state, the period is not limited by the number of variable display times, and the short time state and electric support are available until the next big hit occurs. You may make it control to a control state.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the jackpot probability state. The “high base state (electric power support control state)” and the “low base state (non-electric power support control state)” are used.

  In this embodiment, terms indicating a combination of the state of the big hit probability and the base state are “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy high base state”, “high accuracy low base state”, and Use “highly accurate base state”. The “low probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the high base state. The “high probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the high base state.

  The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to the non-probability changing state, the time-short state, and the electric chew support control state (low-accuracy high-base state) after the end of the 15-round jackpot gaming state. The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to the probability variation state, the short time state, and the electric chew support control state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15-round jackpot gaming state.

  Sudden probability change big hit is controlled to shift to the probability change state after the end of two rounds of big hit game state with very short opening time, and shifts to the short time state and electric chew support control state (high probability / high base state) This is a big hit that is controlled to the non-time-short state and the non-electricity Chu support control state (high probability / low base state) without performing control.

  In the probability variation big hit, the probability variation state, the time reduction state, and the electric Chu support control state continue for a period until the condition that the next big hit occurs is satisfied. In the normal big hit, the period until the shorter condition is satisfied, which is the condition that the time reduction state is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times of the variable display or the condition that the next big hit occurs. continue. The number of times of variable display in which the time reduction state continues is also referred to as the time reduction number.

  Also, in the case of a sudden probability change big hit, the special gaming state consisting of the probability change state continues for a period until the condition that the next big hit occurs is satisfied.

  When the small hit game state is reached, the big hit probability and the base state as the gaming state before the start of the small hit gaming state are maintained after the small hit gaming state ends. In this embodiment, the small hit is an example in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened in the small hit gaming state with the same number of times and the same opening time as the sudden probability change big hit. However, as for the small hits, the opening mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is not completely the same as the opening mode at the time of sudden probability variation big hit, but it is difficult to distinguish from the opening mode at the time of sudden probability variation big hit. It may be visible. In other words, as a small hit, the opening mode of the special variable winning ball device 720 may be a hit in which the special variable winning ball device 720 is opened with substantially the same number of opening times and approximately the same opening time as the sudden probability variation big hit.

  Since the sudden probability variable big hit and the small hit are the same as the number of times and the release time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 720, whether the sudden odd-change big hit or the small hit is in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state? Is difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, when a common performance that does not notify that the probability change state is performed after the end of the big hit gaming state of the sudden probability change big hit and the end of the small hit gaming state, it is determined whether or not the probability changed state. It is difficult for players to recognize. In addition, suddenly probable big hits have a low base after the end of the big hit gaming state, so compared to the small hits where the base does not change after the end of the small hit gaming state, and after the end of the big hit gaming state of the sudden probable big hit, It is difficult for the player to distinguish the operation status after the gaming state is finished. Since such a control state is a state in which the probability variation state is latent, it is called a latent state, and the control for making such a latent state is called latent control. In the case of a sudden probability change big hit that occurs in the high probability low base state, after the big hit gaming state is ended, it may be controlled to a short time state and controlled to electric chew support control. In this way, when shifting to the high-accuracy and high-base state, it is desirable not to perform a latent effect described later.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 701 according to this embodiment, in the effect control CPU 7101, after the end of the big hit gaming state and after the end of the small hit gaming state, a latent effect that provides a common effect without notifying whether or not it is in a probable change state. Is done. For example, in the effect control CPU 7101, when a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command is received at the end of the big hit, the common background image after the big hit gaming state (the small hit gaming state in the case of the small hit) is ended. A common effect, such as displaying. By performing such a latent effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the player is in a probable state, and to improve the interest of the game. The latent effect may be transmitted by sending a command instructing execution of the latent effect from the game control microcomputer 7100 and the effect control CPU 7101 may execute the latent effect in response to the command.

  FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 731. As shown in FIG. FIG. 49 also shows a payout control board 737, an effect control board 780, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 7560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 701 according to a program is mounted on the main board 731. The game control microcomputer 7560 includes a ROM 754 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 755 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 756 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 757. The game control microcomputer 7560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which a ROM 754 and a RAM 755 are incorporated. The game control microcomputer 7560 further includes a random number circuit 7503 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 755 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means that is partly or wholly backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply substrate 7910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 755 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 7560, the CPU 756 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 754, so that the game control microcomputer 7560 (or CPU 756) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 756 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 731.

  The random number circuit 7503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. Random number circuit 7503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 7560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503.

  An input driver circuit 758 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 732a, the first start port switch 713a, the second start port switch 714a, and the count switch 723 to the game control microcomputer 7560 is also mounted on the main board 731. Also, an output circuit 759 for driving a solenoid 716 for opening / closing the variable winning ball device 715 and a solenoid 721 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball device 720 for forming a special winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 7560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 731.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 7560 includes a first special symbol display 708a, a second special symbol display 708b, which displays special symbols in a variable manner, a normal symbol display 710, which displays normal symbols in a variable manner, and a first special symbol hold memory. The display control of the display 718a, the second special symbol storage memory display 718b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 741 is performed.

  The effect control board 780 includes an effect control microcomputer 7100, a ROM 7102, a RAM 7103, a VDP 7109, an I / O port unit 7105, and the like. The ROM 7102 stores a program and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 7103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 7102 and the RAM 7103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 7100. The VDP 7109 performs display control of the effect display device 709 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 7100.

  The effect control microcomputer 7100 provides an effect control command for instructing the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 7560 via the relay board 777 that allows the signal to pass only in one direction from the main board 731 to the effect control board 780. And display control of the frame LED 728 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 735 and also from the speaker 727 via the audio output board 770. Various effects are controlled, such as controlling the sound output.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 7101 receives an operation detection signal from the trigger sensor 7121 as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 7125 of the stick controller 7122 has been detected. Further, the effect control CPU 7101 inputs an operation detection signal from the push sensor 7124 as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 7120 has been detected. In addition, the effect control CPU 7101 inputs an operation detection signal from the tilt direction sensor unit 7123 as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation stick of the stick controller 7122 has been detected. The effect control CPU 7101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 7126 to vibrate the stick controller 7122.

  A card unit 750 is connected to the payout control board 737 via an interface board 766. The card unit 750 outputs a signal instructing the payout control board 737 to pay out game balls such as a lent ball, an acquired ball, and a stored ball. Each counter 705 is connected to the card unit 750. Each counter 705 outputs a signal that can specify the number of balls acquired by the acquired ball detection switch 7501 to the card unit 750.

  In such a gaming machine, when the holding ball / storing ball information screen as described with reference to FIG. 47 is displayed on the display 7123, even if the replay button 7554 is operated, the process for replaying is performed. The ball lending process according to the operation of the ball lending button 751 is executed while the counting is not performed by the acquired ball detection switch 7501 because the operation of the lever portion 794b is disabled. It will not be prevented.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 50, the present invention is provided corresponding to a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 701), and information (card ID) that can specify the amount of gaming value (card balance) that can be used for gaming. Accepts the insertion of a game recording medium (member card or visitor card) on which is recorded, and performs a process (ball lending process) for using the game value in the corresponding gaming machine. Based on accepting the operation of the use processing means (card reader / writer, the control unit of the card unit 750) and the return operation means (return button 752) for accepting an operation for returning the inserted game recording medium. A gaming device (card unit) comprising: return processing means (card reader / writer, control unit of card unit 750) for performing a return process for returning the game recording medium 50), in particular, a confirmation operation means (touch panel display 7123) for accepting a confirmation operation for confirming the return of the inserted game recording medium, and the return process on condition that the confirmation operation is accepted A return setting means (in the card management computer 500) for setting which one of the first return process for performing the return process or the second return process for performing the return process without the condition that the confirmation operation has been accepted. The control unit of the card unit 750 for storing “whether or not a confirmation operation is necessary”, and the return processing unit has received an operation of the return operation unit (in FIG. 53, S202). The first return process or the second return set by the return setting means based on the reception of the return request signal. The process is executed (determining whether or not “confirmation operation is required” is set in S204. If there is no setting, the card is immediately returned in S209, and if there is a setting, it is determined in S208 that the confirmation button is operated in S209. A gaming device characterized in that the card is returned).

  In the following, an example will be described in which the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 701, the gaming medium is a pachinko ball, and the gaming medium is loaned. In the following description, the database may be abbreviated as “DB”, the reader / writer as “R / W”, and the step as “S”.

  The membership card or visitor card is an example of a game recording medium, and is recorded with information that can identify the remaining amount of the card that can be used for a game (pachinko ball lending). A card ID for individually identifying a card or a visitor card and the remaining card amount are recorded. This membership card or visitor card is formed by forming a recording area (not shown) in which a card ID, a card balance and the like are recorded at a predetermined portion of a rectangular plastic thin plate. This is an IC card equipped with a non-contact type integrated circuit (IC chip) having a nonvolatile EEPROM as a recording area.

  The payout control board 737 and the card unit 750 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 are connected via an interface board 766. A PSI signal line, a PRDY signal line, a BRDY signal line, a BRQ signal line, and an EXS signal line are provided between the card unit 750 and the payout control board 737.

  The PSI signal line is a signal line for confirming the connection between the card unit 750 and the pachinko gaming machine 701. By transmitting a connection confirmation signal via the PSI signal line, the launch handle can be operated in the pachinko gaming machine 701.

  The PRDY signal line provides a payable signal indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 701 is in a state (standby state) where communication between the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the card unit 750 is possible with respect to the corresponding card unit 750. This is a signal line for transmission. Specifically, as shown in S1 of FIG. 50, when the voltage level applied to the PRDY signal line is switched from HIGH to LOW, a payout enable signal is sent from the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the card unit 750. Sent.

  The BRDY signal line transmits a ball lending possible signal from the card unit 750 to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701 when there is a ball lending operation in the standby state in which the card unit 750 receives the payable signal. Signal line. Specifically, as shown in S2 of FIG. 50, the voltage level applied to the BRDY signal line is switched from HIGH to LOW, so that a ball lending possible signal is sent from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701. Sent.

  In addition, the BRDY signal line terminates the ball lending from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701 when the ball lending processing for a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 minutes) associated with one ball lending operation is completed. A signal line for transmitting a signal. Specifically, as shown in S7 of FIG. 50, the voltage level applied to the BRDY signal line is switched from LOW to HIGH, so that the ball lending end signal is sent from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701. Sent.

  The BRQ signal line is an example of a lending command signal line (= ball lending command signal line), and a lending request signal (= ball lending) requesting lending of game media from the card unit 750 to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701. Request signal). Specifically, as shown in S3 of FIG. 50, the voltage level applied to the BRQ signal line is switched from HIGH to LOW, so that the ball lending request signal is sent from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701. Sent.

  The BRQ signal line is a signal line for transmitting a lending command signal (= ball lending command signal) that commands lending of a pachinko ball to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701 from the card unit 750. Specifically, as shown in S5 of FIG. 50, the voltage level applied to the BRQ signal line is switched from LOW to HIGH, so that the ball lending command signal is sent from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701. Sent.

  The EXS signal line is an example of a request acknowledge signal line, and a request acknowledge signal indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 701 has accepted the ball lending request to the card unit 750 (that is, the ball lending request signal has been received). Is a signal line for transmitting. Specifically, after the pachinko gaming machine 701 receives the ball lending request signal, it is confirmed that the pachinko gaming machine 701 is ready to lend a pachinko ball (ie, there is no ball out and no error). After that, as shown in S4 of FIG. 50, when the voltage level applied to the EXS signal line is switched from HIGH to LOW, a request acknowledge signal is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the card unit 750. The

  The EXS signal line is a signal line for transmitting a ball lending completion signal indicating that the ball lending processing is completed from the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the card unit 750 when the ball lending processing for several times is completed. It is. Specifically, when the ball lending process is completed, that is, when the pachinko ball has been paid out, the voltage level applied to the EXS signal line is switched from LOW to HIGH as shown in S6 of FIG. As a result, a ball lending completion signal is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the card unit 750.

  That is, the card unit 750 gives a lending preparation signal (for example, a LOW level of the PRDY signal) indicating that a gaming medium (for example, a pachinko ball) can be lent by a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 701). A first receiving means for receiving from the machine, and a lending request signal (for example, a LOW level of the BRDY signal) indicating that a lending operation (for example, operation of the ball lending button 751 of the pachinko gaming machine 701) has been received to the gaming machine. A first transmission means for transmitting; a second transmission means for transmitting a lending command signal (for example, a LOW level of a BRQ signal) for instructing lending of a game medium to the gaming machine after transmission of the lending request signal; and the lending A loanable signal (for example, indicating that the game medium transmitted from the gaming machine can be loaned in response to the request signal and the loan command signal (for example, Second receiving means for receiving the LOW level of the EXS signal), third sending means for sending a loan confirmation signal (for example, HIGH level of the BRQ signal) indicating confirmation of reception of the loanable signal to the gaming machine, Lending of game media (for example, actual payout of pachinko balls, addition of the number of game balls) is executed in the gaming machine in response to the lending confirmation signal, and is sent when completed, indicating completion of lending of game media Third receiving means for receiving a signal (for example, HIGH level of the EXS signal), and fourth transmitting means for transmitting a loan request end signal (for example, HIGH level of the BRDY signal) indicating the end of the loan request to the gaming machine. Is provided.

  The touch panel display 7123 is for accepting operations from the player and displaying various information. Specifically, as shown in D0 of FIG. 52, it functions as a display means for displaying a warning regarding the return of the membership card or visitor card, and the return button 752 is operated as shown in D1 of FIG. It functions as a return operation notifying means for notifying the effect, and further functions as a confirmation operation means for receiving a confirmation operation for confirming the return of the inserted member card or visitor card as shown in D2 of FIG. .

  When the setting mode is activated in the card management computer 500, a setting screen shown in FIG. In this setting screen, a radio button for setting whether or not the confirmation operation is necessary and a radio button for setting whether or not to display the alert display are displayed. Then, by operating the input device of the card management computer 500, selecting whether the confirmation operation is necessary or not and whether or not to display a warning, and operating the “Setting” button, the setting is performed. The contents are transmitted to each card unit 750 and stored in the EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750.

  Here, the EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 may perform the first return process for performing the return process on the condition that the confirmation operation has been accepted, or the return process without having the condition for accepting the confirmation operation. This function functions as a return setting means for setting which of the second return processing to be executed, and a confirmation operation is required according to the setting content received from the card management computer 500 (that is, the first return processing is performed). Or whether the confirmation operation is unnecessary (that is, the second return process is performed) is stored. The EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 functions as display setting means for setting whether or not to perform a warning display, and displays a warning display according to the setting content received from the card management computer 500. Alternatively, it memorizes whether or not to display an alert.

  Next, the operation of the card unit 750 (that is, processing performed by the control unit of the card unit 750) will be described.

  The ball lending process performed by the control unit of the card unit 750 will be described. When the card unit 750 accepts a ball lending operation with the card remaining amount recorded on the membership card or visitor card being several minutes or more once, the control unit of the card unit 750 first uses the BRQ signal line to make a pachinko game. The ball lending request signal (S3 in FIG. 50) is transmitted to the payout control board 737 of the machine 701, and the request acknowledge signal (S4) transmitted from the payout control board 737 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 via the EXS signal line is received. Wait. If it is determined that the request acknowledge signal has been received, the ball lending command signal (S5) is transmitted to the payout control board 737 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 via the BRQ signal line, and the pachinko machine via the EXS signal line. It waits for the reception of the ball lending completion signal (S6) transmitted from the payout control board 737 of the gaming machine 701. If it is determined that the ball lending completion signal has been received, the card reader / writer updates and subtracts the amount of money for one time from the remaining amount of card recorded on the member card or visitor card, and a remaining number display portion 753 The display of the remaining frequency at 1 is subtracted by 1 frequency, and the process ends. The control unit of the card unit 750 performs a process (ball lending process) for using the card remaining amount specified from the recorded information of the member card or the visitor card that has been inserted into the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701. It functions as a usage processing means.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the alert display process performed by the control unit of the card unit 750 will be described. When the card unit 750 accepts a membership card or a visitor card (that is, is inserted), the control unit of the card unit 750 displays “a warning display” based on the stored contents of the EEPROM functioning as the display setting means. It is determined whether or not “Yes” is set (S101). If it is determined that “not display alert” is set (NO), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that “notice display” is set (YES), the display timing (for example, every 2 minutes) is waited (S102). An alerting display (for example, “Please be careful about forgetting to remove the card or theft” shown in D0) is displayed on the display 7123 (S103), and the process is terminated. That is, if “to display caution” is set, a caution display is displayed at each display timing. According to this, an alerting display can be performed regardless of whether the first return process or the second return process is performed. The display timing can be arbitrarily set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the return process which the control part of the card unit 750 performs is demonstrated. If there is a return operation (operation of the return button 752) in the pachinko gaming machine 701 in a state where the card unit 750 is accepting a member card or a visitor card (that is, inserted) (YES in S201), the pachinko gaming machine When the return request signal is transmitted from 701 to the card unit 750 (S202) and the card unit 750 receives the return request signal, a return process is started and a return operation notification (for example, “Return button shown in D1” Is operated ”) is displayed on the display 7123. Thus, by executing the return process based on the receipt of the return request, the pachinko gaming machine 701 only performs a normal process of transmitting a return request signal by operating the return button 752, so the pachinko machine There is no need to change the gaming machine 701. Further, since the fact that the return button 752 has been operated is notified, the player can discover that another person has operated the return button 752.

  Next, the control unit of the card unit 750 determines whether or not “confirmation operation is required” is set based on the stored contents of the EEPROM functioning as the return setting means (S204). Here, when it is determined that “confirmation operation is not required” is set (NO), that is, when it is set to execute the second return process in which the return process is performed without the condition that the confirmation operation is accepted. Returns the member card or visitor card that has been accepted (that is, inserted), displays a return indication (for example, “Please take the card” shown in D3) on the display 7123 (S209), and performs the processing. finish.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that “confirmation operation is required” is set (YES), that is, when it is set to execute the first return processing that performs the return processing on condition that the confirmation operation is accepted The time measurement is started (S205), a confirmation operation request display (for example, “please press the confirmation button” and confirmation button shown in D2) is displayed on the display 7123 (S207), and the time is up (for example, 10 seconds have elapsed). Until the operation of the confirmation button is waited until (S207, S208).

  If it is determined that the confirmation button has not been operated before the time is up (NO in S207), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a confirmation button operation before the time is up (YES in S208), the process proceeds to S209 and the process is terminated. Here, the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S205 functions as a time measuring unit that starts timing based on the reception of the return request signal, and the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the processes of S207 to S209. If the return setting means is set to execute the first return process (YES in S204), the return process performs the return process on the condition that the time measured by the time measuring means is received within the predetermined time. It functions as a processing means. According to this, since the membership card or the visitor card is not returned unless the confirmation operation is performed within a predetermined time, it is possible to make it difficult for the other person to steal the membership card or the visitor card. The predetermined time can be set arbitrarily, but it is longer than the time required for the player to operate the return button 752 until the confirmation button is operated, and another person who aims to steal the membership card or visitor card returns the return button. It is preferably shorter than the time required for operating the confirmation button after operating 752.

  Moreover, it is preferable that the confirmation button is provided at a position away from the return button 752 by a predetermined interval. Here, the predetermined interval is, for example, within a range in which the player can see both the return button 752 and the confirmation button in view. According to this, since it is difficult for another person who operates the return button 752 to operate the confirmation button without noticing the player, the member card or the visitor card can be more effectively prevented from being stolen. Since the return button 752 is often provided on the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 701, the confirmation button is not only the card unit 750 arranged on the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 701, but also the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 701 itself. Alternatively, it may be provided on the calling lamp 200 installed on the upper side of the pachinko gaming machine 701.

  As described above, the confirmation operation means (confirmation button displayed on the touch panel display 7123) for accepting the confirmation operation for confirming the return of the inserted member card or visitor card and the confirmation operation are accepted. A return button 752 for setting which of the first return process for performing the return process or the second return process for performing the return process without the condition that the confirmation operation has been received is set. Since the first return process or the second return process is executed based on the receipt of the operation, in order to prevent the game recording medium from being stolen during the game, the store staff closely monitors the theft The amusement hall that operates to prevent the situation may be set to execute the second return process, reducing the monitoring burden on the store clerk, but making the player troublesome Game arcade wishing to operate to prevent theft since it is sufficient to set the execution of the first return processing by, it is possible to provide a card unit 750 capable of supporting both a game arcade.

  Note that the gaming device is provided with each unit counting device for counting the number of acquired game media (the number of possessed balls) acquired by the player, and the remaining card amount and the number of retained balls are stored and displayed on the gaming device. In this case, the storage and display of the remaining amount of the card is erased, the remaining amount card (corresponding to the membership card or the visitor card of the present invention) that can specify only the remaining amount of the card is discharged, and the storage and display of the number of balls is retained. It is conceivable to configure a gaming device. According to this, when a big hit or the like occurs in the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701, the remaining card can be discharged for the time being, so that the card remaining can be prevented from being stolen. The number of balls you have may be stolen, but if you have two cards to return to the player, handling will be cumbersome. Later, it is possible to discharge a ball card that can specify the number of balls. However, with such a gaming device, it is possible to discharge the remaining card without erasing the memory and display of the number of balls, so even if the remaining card is stolen by another person, If it is set that the first return process is performed by applying the invention (confirmation operation is necessary), it is particularly effective because the remaining amount card is difficult to be stolen.

Next, a modification of the above embodiment will be described.
In the above embodiment, the card balance recorded on the member card or visitor card is compared with the card balance managed by the card management computer 500 in association with the card ID of the member card or visitor card. In the above description, an example in which ball lending using the remaining card amount recorded on the membership card or the visitor card is performed when the verification is OK has been described.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the card remaining amount is not recorded on the member card or visitor card, but the card remaining amount managed by the card management computer 500 is used in association with the card ID of the member card or visitor card. The ball management may be performed, and conversely, the card management computer 500 does not manage the remaining amount of the card, and the remaining amount of the card recorded on the membership card or the visitor card is used. good.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the return operation means (return button 752) and the return confirmation means (confirmation buttons displayed on the touch panel display 7123) are separate has been described. It may be a button.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the return confirmation unit is a confirmation button displayed on the touch panel display 7123 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the return confirmation unit is provided at a predetermined location of the card unit 750. It may be an independent button.

  Also, the return confirmation means is a numeric keypad displayed on the touch panel display 7123 (or a numeric keypad provided separately on the card unit 750), and the password desired by the player is entered and stored using the numeric keypad. When an operation is requested, an input of a personal identification number may be accepted with a numeric keypad, and a confirmation operation may be accepted when it is determined that the inputted personal identification number matches the stored personal identification number. . According to this, although the time and effort of the player is increased, the confirmation operation is not accepted unless the password stored by the player is inputted, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the game recording medium from being stolen.

  The return confirmation means is an IC chip R / W provided in the card unit 750, and the IC chip identification information built in the portable terminal possessed by the player is read in advance by the IC chip R / W. When the confirmation operation is requested, the identification information is read from the IC chip of the portable terminal with the IC chip R / W, and it is determined that the read identification information matches the stored identification information. Accordingly, the confirmation operation may be accepted. According to this, since the confirmation operation cannot be accepted unless it is the portable terminal of the player, it is possible to reliably prevent the game recording medium from being stolen.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, whether or not a confirmation operation is necessary and whether or not to display a warning is set in the card management computer 500, and the setting contents are set for each. The example in which the data is transmitted to the card unit 750 and stored (set) in the EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each card unit 750 may be set to determine whether or not a confirmation operation is necessary and whether or not to display a warning. For example, each card unit 750 may be set by providing a dip switch, or each card unit 750 may be set by a remote controller, or may be set by a touch panel display 7123. According to this, even if the card management computer 500 and each card unit 750 are offline, these settings can be performed. Note that the setting on the touch panel display 7123 may be set not only by the store clerk but also by the player.

  Further, the same setting may not be made for all card units 750 provided in the game hall, but different settings may be made for each card unit 750. For example, it is set that a confirmation operation is necessary for a card unit 750 on a certain amusement island (that is, the first return process is performed), and the monitoring operation is reduced, while a confirmation operation is performed on a card unit 750 on a certain amusement island. It can be set to be unnecessary (that is, the second return process is performed), so that the salesclerk can be closely monitored. In this case, as described above, the setting is not limited to each card unit 750, but can be set for each card unit 750 in the card management computer 500.

  In the above-described embodiment, a setting content screen indicating whether the first return process (confirmation operation is required) is set or the second return process (confirmation operation is not required) is set is displayed on the display 7123. Anyway. This setting content screen is displayed at a position close to the confirmation button, or is displayed together with a screen on which the remaining number (and the number of balls in the card unit 750 with each counter) is displayed. An unauthorized person who steals a game recording medium often decides whether or not to steal by looking at the screen, but it can be expected to abandon the theft by displaying this setting content screen.

  In the above embodiment, the display 7123 displays the remaining number and the number of balls, and a camera is provided in the card unit 750. When the camera senses a person approaching the card unit 750 other than the player playing the game, You may make it erase | eliminate the display of the number of remaining degrees or the number of balls. According to this, since an unauthorized person cannot immediately grasp the remaining number and the number of balls, it leads to theft prevention. Here, it is more preferable to display an alert instead of erasing the display of the remaining number and the number of balls.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in S208 of FIG. 53, an example in which a member card or a visitor card is returned when a confirmation operation (operation of a confirmation button) is accepted once has been described. When the operation is received a plurality of times, the member card or the visitor card may be returned.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, an example in which a membership card or a visitor card is returned when a confirmation operation (operation of the confirmation button) is accepted after a return operation (operation of the return button 752) is accepted. However, not limited to this, the membership card or the visitor card may be returned when the confirmation operation is accepted and then the return operation is accepted. Even if the user wants to press the button 751 and presses the return button 752 by mistake, the membership card or the visitor card is not returned. That is, the order of the return operation and the confirmation operation is not particularly limited.

  In the above embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 701 is not operated for a predetermined time with the membership card or visitor card inserted in the card unit 750 (for example, the player enters a break without returning the membership card or the visitor card). When the user leaves the seat), the user may enter a safe mode in which the operation of the return button 752 or the ball lending button 751 is restricted in order to prevent the theft of the membership card or the visitor card and the use of the remaining card amount. Specifically, the safe mode is started after the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 701 is stopped, and the safe mode is entered when the measured time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes). This predetermined time can be arbitrarily set. If the return button 752 is operated during the safe mode timing, the timing is temporarily stopped. If the confirmation button is operated before the time is up in S207 of FIG. 53, the member card or the visitor card is returned. When the time is up without the confirmation button being operated, the temporarily stopped timing is resumed. In order to return from the safe mode, a remote control operation by a game clerk, an input of a personal identification number, or the like is accepted.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 58, the present invention is provided corresponding to a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 701) and has received a value (banknote, membership card or visitor card) possessed by the player (in S101 and S102). YES) based on the received acceptance value (acceptance amount, remaining card amount), usable processing means for performing usable processing (remaining frequency storage processing) that can be used for gaming in the corresponding gaming machine (S117, The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S108), and the use process (ball lending process) that uses the usable value (number of remaining times) that can be used by the usable process for the game in the corresponding gaming machine. Use processing means (the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S135), and a post-use remaining after subtracting the use value provided for the use processing from the usable value And return processing means for returning process for returning an identifiable recording medium value (control unit of the card unit 750 performs the process of S126), a device for a game having a (card unit 750).

  Then, in the gaming device according to the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the usable processing means provides a condition that the accepted value is less than a predetermined value (NO in S116) as the usable processing. As a condition, all available processing (S117) is performed in which all of the received value is used as the available value, and the received value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (YES in S116). Based on the receipt of a return operation (YES in S125), the return processing unit performs the return process while performing a partly usable process (S118) with a part as the usable value. It is possible to specify the remaining value at the time of reception that was not regarded as the usable value of the received value without receiving a return operation based on the fact that the part usable process was performed Wherein by performing the value accepted at returning process for returning the recording medium (S119), characterized in that to prevent the overuse of the value of the game.

  In addition, in the gaming device according to the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment, a cumulative value specifying process for performing a cumulative value specifying process for enabling each player to specify a cumulative value that is a cumulative value of the use value. Means (the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S136), and the return processing means performs the return process based on accepting a return operation (YES in S125), while the value is Based on the acceptance (YES in S101), a part or all of the acceptance value is accepted without accepting a return operation on condition that the cumulative value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (YES in S116 ′). It is possible to prevent overuse of the value to the game by performing a return process at the time of receiving a value (S119) for returning the identifiable recording medium. To.

  The EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 stores a predetermined amount table shown in FIG. This predetermined amount table can be partially used in the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment for each player's age (in this example, 20's, 30's, 40's, 50's and 60 or more). Whether to perform return processing upon receipt of value in the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment and the first predetermined amount to be compared with the received amount in order to determine whether or not to perform processing and return processing upon receipt of value A second predetermined amount to be compared with the accumulated amount to determine the value and a specific amount to be compared with the accumulated amount to determine whether or not to perform value reception prohibition processing described later in both embodiments are set and stored. ing.

  Here, the first predetermined amount, the second predetermined amount, and the specific amount are set to different values for each player (in this example, for each player's age). A player who is easy to use too much (in this example, in his 20s and 60s or more) is set at a lower price than a player of other ages. According to this, for example, overuse of the value to the game can be prevented for a low-income person or a player who is easy to use too much.

  The predetermined value is an amount corresponding to a preset high denomination currency, specifically 5000 yen for players in their 20s and 60s, and for players of other ages. It is 10,000 yen. According to this, when the money of the high denomination is received, the partially usable process and the return process at the time of receiving the value are performed, so that it is possible to prevent excessive use of the value for the game.

  Further, the EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 also stores a display reference amount corresponding product table shown in FIG. In this display reference amount corresponding product table, for each display reference amount (10000 yen, 20000 yen, 30000 yen ... in this example) to be compared with the cumulative amount in order to determine whether or not to perform product notification processing described later, Genre products are set and stored.

  The card reader / writer is an example of a recording medium accepting unit, accepts a membership card or a visitor card inserted from the card insertion slot 25a, and obtains a card ID and a card remaining amount recorded on the accepted membership card or visitor card. Read. The card reader / writer includes an IC chip R / W corresponding to an IC chip of a membership card or a visitor card that is the IC card. Then, as shown in FIG. 58, the card reader / writer adds and updates the received amount to the remaining card amount recorded on the accepted membership card or visitor card when deposit is made (S117). When this is done, the ball lending usage amount is subtracted and updated from the remaining card amount (S135). When the member card or visitor card is returned from the card reader / writer (S126), the stock card, which is a visitor card stored in the card storage unit, is transported to the card reader / writer and becomes a reserved card (S127).

  The face image photographing camera is for photographing a player who plays a game with the pachinko gaming machine 701 corresponding to the card unit 750. Face data is extracted from the face image of the player imaged by the face image photographing camera by the image recognition processing of the control unit of the card unit 750.

  Next, the card management computer 500 is a computer provided at a predetermined location (for example, a management office) in the game hall. The card management computer 500 stores a card DB shown in FIG. In this card DB, for each card ID of each member card or visitor card, a card remaining amount and a return flag upon deposit are stored. If the deposit return flag is “1”, it indicates that the card is a member card or a visitor card returned in the value reception return process. The remaining card amount is not cleared even after the business day ends, but the return flag at the time of deposit is cleared to “0” after the business day ends.

  Next, the hall computer 540 is also a computer provided at a predetermined location (for example, a management office) in the game hall. The hall computer 540 stores a player DB shown in FIG. In this player DB, for each face data extracted from the player's face image captured by the face image capturing camera (that is, for each player), the player's age determined based on the face data, The accumulated amount obtained by accumulating the amount used by the player for the game is stored. Note that the stored content of the player DB is cleared after the business day ends.

  Next, the settlement apparatus 580 is provided at a predetermined location in the amusement hall (for example, in the vicinity of the prize exchange counter). When the membership card or the visitor card is received, the card ID of the membership card or the visitor card is given to the card management computer 500. And when the card balance stored in the card DB in association with the card ID is received from the card management computer 500, the received card balance and the card balance recorded on the member card or visitor card Are matched, an error process is performed if they do not match, and a settlement process for paying out the remaining money of the card is performed if they match.

  In the checkout process, the deposit return flag stored in the card DB in association with the card ID of the accepted member card or visitor card is also received from the card management computer 500, and the received return flag is received. Is “1”, that is, if the received member card or visitor card is the first card returned in the return process at the time of value reception, a notification prompting the reception of the second card returned in the normal return process May be performed. According to this, since the payment of the second card is not forgotten, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the operation of the card unit 750 which is the gaming apparatus according to the present invention (that is, the processing performed by the control unit of the card unit 750) will be described. Here, the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment will be described first, and then only the differences of the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment from the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment will be described. explain.

  First, the card unit 750 waits for reception of banknotes (S101) or reception of a membership card or visitor card (S102). If a banknote is accepted in S101 (YES), the accepted banknote is identified (S111). If the banknote is identified as NG, the banknote is returned. If the banknote is identified, player identification processing is performed (S112). In this player identification process, a player is imaged by a face image capturing camera, face data is extracted from the captured player's face image by image recognition processing, and the extracted face data is sent to the hall computer 540. Send.

  The hall computer 540 that has received the face data determines whether or not the face data is registered in the player DB. If registered, the age and the total amount corresponding to the face data are stored in the card unit 750. If not registered, the player's age is specified based on the face data, the specified age is stored in association with the face data, and the age corresponding to the face data is stored. The accumulated amount (here, zero) is returned to the card unit 750.

  Next, the card unit 750 specifies the predetermined amount (here, the first predetermined amount) and the specific amount stored in the predetermined amount table in association with the age received from the hall computer 540 in the player identification process of S112. Then, it is determined whether or not the accumulated amount received from the hall computer 540 is equal to or greater than the specified specific amount (S114). If it is determined in S114 that the accumulated amount is less than the specific amount (NO), the accepted banknote is returned (S115), and the process is terminated.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S115 performs a value reception prohibition process (in this case, a process of returning the banknote in S115) for prohibiting the reception of the value on the condition that the accumulated value is equal to or greater than the specific value. It functions as a value reception prohibition processing means for performing. According to this, if the accumulated value is equal to or greater than the specific value, the acceptance of the value is prohibited, so that overuse of the value for the game can be prevented.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S114 that the accumulated amount is equal to or greater than the specified amount (YES), it is determined whether or not the received amount is equal to or greater than the specified predetermined amount (S116). If it is determined in S116 that the received amount is less than the predetermined amount (NO), the received amount is stored in the remaining number, and the received amount is recorded on the reservation card, and the process proceeds to S122. On the other hand, if it is determined in S116 that the accepted amount is equal to or larger than the predetermined amount (YES), the half of the accepted amount is stored in the remaining frequency (S118), and the half of the accepted amount is recorded on the reservation card and returned. (S119), the process proceeds to S120.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the processing of S117 and S118, based on the reception of the value (banknote) owned by the player, the received reception value (reception amount) at the corresponding gaming machine. It functions as a usable processing means for performing usable processing (remaining frequency storage processing) that can be used for a game, and as the usable processing, the acceptance value is provided on condition that the acceptance value is less than a predetermined value. All usable processes (S117) to make all of the received values usable, and on the condition that the received value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a part (half price here) of the received value is used as the usable value. The partially usable process (S118) is performed.

  Further, the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S119 does not accept the return operation based on the fact that the partially usable process has been performed, and does not regard the usable value of the received value. It functions as a return processing means for performing return processing at the time of value reception (S119) for returning a recording medium that can specify the remaining value at the time of reception (here, half of the received amount).

  According to this, if the reception value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a part of the reception value is subjected to a partially usable process and the usable value is not included in the reception value. Since the return processing at the time of receiving a value for returning a recording medium that can specify the remaining value at the time of reception is performed, it is necessary to receive the recording medium in order to use the remaining value at the time of reception for a game (that is, one-hour work) Therefore, overuse of value for games can be prevented. Further, since there is an opportunity to settle the value of the returned recording medium with the settlement apparatus 580, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

  Next, the card unit 750 performs card management of a return notification at the time of deposit including the card ID of the member card or visitor card returned in S119 and the card remaining amount recorded in the member card or visitor card (here, half of the accepted amount). It is transmitted to the computer 500 (S120), one of the membership card or visitor card stored in the card storage unit is transported to the card reader / writer and reserved, and the usable value (here, the received amount) for the reserved card (Half price) is recorded (S121), and the process proceeds to S122.

  Here, the card management computer 500 that has received the deposit return notification in S120 associates the remaining amount of the card included in the received deposit return notification with the card ID included in the received deposit return notification in the card DB. And a deposit return flag “1”. The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S120 functions as a return processing unit that performs a value reception return specifying process that can specify that the recording medium is returned in the value reception return process (S119). is there.

  If the member card or visitor card is received in S102 (YES), the member card or visitor card (retained card) reserved by the card reader / writer is stored in the card storage unit (S103), and the received member is received. The card ID and card remaining amount of the card or visitor card are read (S104), and collation processing is performed (S105).

  In this verification process, the read card ID is transmitted to the card management computer 500, and the remaining card amount and the deposit return flag stored in the card DB in association with the card ID are received from the card management computer 500. Then, it is determined whether or not the received card remaining amount matches the read card remaining amount. If they do not match, error processing is performed, and if they match, the process proceeds to S105.

  Next, the card unit 750 determines whether or not the deposit return flag received in the verification process of S105 is “1”, that is, the received membership card or visitor card is returned in the value reception return process. It is determined whether or not there is (S106). If it is determined in S106 that the return flag at the time of deposit is “0” (NO), that is, the received member card or visitor card is not returned by the return process at the time of value reception, the card remaining amount read Is stored in the remaining frequency (S108), and the process proceeds to S122.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S108 receives the received value (card balance) based on the received value (member card or visitor card) owned by the player, and the corresponding gaming machine. It functions as usable processing means for performing usable processing (remaining frequency storage processing) that can be used for games in the game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S106 that the return flag at the time of deposit is 1 (YES), that is, the received member card or visitor card has been returned in the return process at the time of value reception, an alert notification (for example, "Do you use too much?" Shown in D0 is displayed on the display 7123 (S107), and the process proceeds to S108.

  The control unit and display 7123 of the card unit 750 that performs the processing of S107 are based on receiving the recording medium that has been returned in the value reception return processing (S119) and that has undergone the value reception return specification processing (S120). Thus, it functions as a caution alerting means for performing alerting. According to this, when receiving the recording medium returned by the return processing at the time of receiving the value, a notice for calling attention is performed, so that overuse of the value to the game can be prevented.

  Next, the card unit 750 waits for operation of the ball lending button 751 (S122), reception of banknotes (S123), reception of a membership card or visitor card (S124), or operation of the return button 752 (S125). If there is an operation of the ball lending button 751 in S122 (YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined confirmation condition is satisfied (S131). Here, the confirmation condition is, for example, “the accumulated value is a certain value or more”. Specifically, the accumulated amount received from the hall computer 540 in the player identification process of S112 is displayed in the display reference amount corresponding product table. One of the stored display reference amounts has been reached.

  If it is determined in S131 that the confirmation condition is satisfied (YES), as shown in D2, the accumulated amount is stored in the display reference amount corresponding product table in association with the reached display reference amount. The displayed product and a confirmation button are displayed on the display 7123 (S132), and the process proceeds to S133.

  Here, the control unit and display 7123 of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S132 displays the accumulated value on the condition that the confirmation condition (here, the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a certain value) is satisfied. It functions as a means. According to this, by letting the player grasp the accumulated value, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value to the game.

  Further, the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S132 and the display 7123 function as a product notification unit that notifies the product corresponding to the accumulated value. According to this, since the commodity purchased with the value used in the game is notified, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

  Next, the card unit 750 switches the display of D2 and the display of D2 ′ that displays “Please press the confirmation button” and the confirmation button at predetermined intervals (for example, every 3 seconds), and operates the confirmation button. (S133), and if there is a confirmation button operation (YES), the display of D2 and D2 ′ is erased and the ball lending process is performed (S135). The ball lending process is also performed when it is determined in S131 that the confirmation condition is not satisfied (NO) (S135). This ball lending process has been described in the third embodiment.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S135 causes the usable value (remaining frequency) made available by the usable process (S117, S118, S108) to be used for the game in the corresponding gaming machine. It functions as a usage processing means for performing usage processing. Here, the usage processing is performed on the basis of accepting the usage operation (operation of the ball lending button 751) (YES in S122), and the accumulated value is constant. Based on the fact that the use operation is accepted on the condition that it is equal to or greater than the value (YES in S131) and a specific operation (operation of the confirmation button) different from the use operation is further accepted (YES in S133), Use processing is performed. According to this, if the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a certain value, the number of operations for performing the use process increases, so that excessive use of the value for the game can be prevented.

  Next, the card unit 750 transmits a ball lending usage amount notification including the ball lending usage amount used for the ball lending processing and the card ID of the reservation card to the card management computer 500, and the ball lending usage amount. A ball lending usage amount notification including face data is transmitted to the hall computer 540 (S136), and it is determined whether the remaining frequency after the ball lending process is zero (S137). ) Return to S122, and if it is zero (YES), the process is terminated.

  The card management computer 500 that has received the notice of the amount used for the ball loan subtracts the amount used for the ball loan included in the notification from the remaining amount of the card stored in the card DB in association with the card ID included in the notification. The hall computer 540 that has received the ball lending usage amount notification adds the ball lending usage amount included in the notification to the accumulated amount stored in the player DB in association with the face data included in the notification.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S136 functions as a cumulative value specifying processing unit that performs a cumulative value specifying process for enabling each player to specify a cumulative value that is a cumulative value of use. . According to this, various processes based on the accumulated value can be performed.

  If a bill is accepted in S123 (YES), the process proceeds to S111. If a membership card or a visitor card is received in S124 (YES), the process proceeds to S103. If the return button 752 is operated in S125 (YES), the membership card or visitor card retained by the card reader / writer is returned (S126), and the membership card or visitor card stored in the card storage unit is returned. One sheet is conveyed to the card reader / writer and reserved, and the process is terminated.

  Next, a difference between the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment and the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the first predetermined amount is specified in S113 of FIG. 58, but in the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the second predetermined amount in S113. Is identified. Specifically, the predetermined amount (here, the second predetermined amount) stored in the predetermined amount table and the specific amount are specified in association with the age received from the hall computer 540 in the player identification process of S112.

  In the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, it is determined in S116 of FIG. 58 whether or not the received amount is equal to or larger than the first predetermined amount. In the embodiment, in S116 ′ instead of S116, it is determined whether or not the accumulated amount is greater than or equal to the second predetermined value. If the accumulated amount is less than the second predetermined value (NO), the process proceeds to S117, and the accumulated amount is determined. Is equal to or greater than the second predetermined value (YES), the process proceeds to S118, and a return process upon receipt of value is performed in S119. In this example, in the return process at the time of value reception, half of the received amount is recorded and returned on the reservation card, but the entire received amount may be recorded on the reservation card and returned.

  That is, based on the fact that the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S119 in the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment has received the value (YES in S101), the accumulated value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value. It functions as a return processing means for performing return processing at the time of value reception for returning a recording medium that can specify a part or all of the received value without receiving a return operation on the condition (YES in S116 ′). Is.

  According to this, when the value is accepted, if the accumulated value that is the accumulated value of use is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the value is received for returning a recording medium that can specify a part or all of the accepted value When the return process is performed, in order to use the returned value for the game, it is necessary to accept the recording medium (that is, the time and effort is increased). Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive use of the value for the game. Further, since there is an opportunity to settle the value of the returned recording medium with the settlement apparatus 580, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

Finally, a modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the second to fourth embodiments described above, the example in which the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 701 has been described. However, the gaming machine is not limited thereto, and the gaming machine may be a slot machine or a game that uses a medal as a gaming medium, for example. Enclosed pachinko machine in which pachinko balls, which are media, are inaccessible, pachinko machines and slot machines that can be played using score data without using pachinko balls and medals, game areas and pachinko balls in the image It may be an image-type pachinko machine that is displayed in this manner, an image-type slot machine in which reels are displayed as images, or the like.

  In the second to fourth embodiments described above, an example in which the lending of the game medium is a ball lending that lends a pachinko ball has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lending of the game medium lends the medal. For example, in the above-mentioned image-type pachinko machine or slot machine, the remaining card amount may be converted into a score as a game medium and used in a game.

  In the second to fourth embodiments, the example in which the currency is a banknote has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the currency may be a coin or both a banknote and a coin. . Also, it is not limited to accepting deposits of tangible money, but intangible money (for example, money data equivalent to money amount such as electronic money, balance of deposit account specified from debit card record information, or credit) You may make it receive the payment of the credit amount etc. which are specified from the recording information of a card | curd in contact or non-contact. Further, the gaming apparatus (card unit 750) may be one that cannot accept money (that is, cannot deposit money).

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the money (banknote) received by the money receiving means (banknote identification machine 24) is discharged to the outside of the gaming apparatus (card unit 750) and is transported by the banknote transport mechanism. Alternatively, the accepted money may be stored inside the gaming device.

  In the above first to fourth embodiments, the example in which the member card or the visitor card is an IC card that records information using a non-contact type IC chip has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The visitor card may record information using a contact IC chip, a magnetic stripe, a two-dimensional code (for example, a bar code), a three-dimensional code, or optical interference (for example, a hologram). Further, these shapes are not limited to the card type, and may be a coin type. Further, the game recording medium may be a mobile phone or the like mounted with an IC chip, instead of a membership card or a visitor card.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the remaining card amount is recorded on the membership card or the visitor card has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining card amount is not recorded on the membership card or the visitor card. It may be one that manages the remaining card amount (complete ID management).

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the recording medium is a membership card or a visitor card has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the recording medium is information that can specify the number of acquired game media (the number of possessed balls, the number of stored balls). May be a possession card or a membership card. That is, the recording medium may be any recording medium on which information capable of specifying the value owned by the player is recorded.

  When the recording medium is a possession card, the number of possessions is managed by the possession management device in association with the card ID of the possession card, and when the possession card is received in the card unit 750, In the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the card ID of the possession card is transmitted to the possession management device, and the number of possessions managed in association with the card ID is received. If the amount equivalent to the received number of balls is equal to or more than the first predetermined amount (YES in S116), half of the number of balls is stored as the number of available balls (S118), The possession card that can specify half of the number is returned (S119).

  According to this, if the received value (the number of possessed balls) is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a partly usable process is performed in which a part of the received value (in this example, half of the number of possessed balls) is used. As a result of the return processing at the time of receiving the value to return the recording medium that can specify the remaining value at the time of reception (in this example, half of the number of possessions) that was not regarded as the usable value of the received value In order to use the remaining value at the time of reception in the game, it is necessary to receive the recording medium, so that it is possible to prevent excessive use of the value in the game.

  In the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment, if the accumulated amount is equal to or greater than the second predetermined value (YES in S116 '), the processes in S118 and S119 are performed. According to this, when the value (mochitama card) is accepted, if the accumulated value, which is the accumulated value of use, is greater than or equal to the predetermined value, a part or all of the accepted value (the number of possessions) can be specified. By performing return processing at the time of receiving a value for returning the recording medium, it is necessary to receive the recording medium in order to use the returned value for the game, so that excessive use of the value for the game is prevented. it can.

  When the recording medium is a member card, the number of stored balls is managed by the stored ball management device in association with the member ID recorded on the member card, and when the card unit 750 receives the member card, The member ID of the membership card is transmitted to the storage management device, and the number of storages managed in association with the member ID is received. In the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the received If the amount corresponding to the number of stored balls is equal to or greater than the first predetermined amount (YES in S116), half of the number of stored balls is stored as the number of usable stored balls (S118), and the member capable of specifying half of the number of stored balls can be specified. The card is returned (S119).

  According to this, if the received value (the number of stored balls) is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a part of the received value (a half of the number of stored balls in this example) is used as a usable value. At the time of reception, the return processing at the time of receiving the value for returning the recording medium that can identify the remaining value at the time of reception (in this example, half of the number of stored balls) that was not regarded as the usable value of the received value is performed. In order to use the remaining value for the game, it is necessary to accept the recording medium, so that it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

  In the second embodiment, if the accumulated amount is equal to or greater than the second predetermined value (YES in S116 '), the processes of S118 and S119 are performed. According to this, when the value (member card) is accepted, if the accumulated value that is the accumulated value of use is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a recording medium that can specify a part or all of the accepted value (number of stored balls) Since the return process at the time of receiving the value for returning the game requires the reception of the recording medium in order to use the returned value for the game, it is possible to prevent excessive use of the value for the game.

  In the above second to fourth embodiments, as shown in FIG. 48, an example in which the remaining frequency display portion 753, the ball lending button 751, and the return button 752 are provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701 has been described. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and some or all of these may be provided in the card unit 750.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the first predetermined amount, the second predetermined amount, and the specific amount are set for each player's age in the predetermined amount table of FIG. 54 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first predetermined amount, the second predetermined amount, and the specific amount may be uniform regardless of the player's age, and conversely, different values are set for each player. May be. According to this, for example, overuse of value to a game can be more effectively prevented for a low-income person or a player who is easy to use too much.

  In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the age and the accumulated amount are stored in association with the player's face data in the player DB of FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of the player's face data, a member card or a visitor card card ID, or a member card member ID, or the like is stored in association with information that can individually identify the player. It may be.

  In the above embodiment, it is determined in S106 of FIG. 58 that the deposit return flag is “1”, that is, the accepted member card or visitor card is returned in the value acceptance return processing (S119). And the example where alerting alerting | reporting is performed by S107 was demonstrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when it is determined that the deposit return flag is “0”, that is, the accepted membership card or visitor card has been returned in the normal return process (S126). You may perform alerting alerting | reporting.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined in S116 of FIG. 58 that the received amount is greater than or equal to the first predetermined amount, and when it is determined in S116 ′ that the accumulated amount is greater than or equal to the second predetermined amount, in S119 Although the example in which the return process at the time of receiving a value is described has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the return process at the time of receiving a value may be always performed without performing the determination of S116 or S116 ′. According to this, since the return process at the time of receiving the value is always performed, in order to use the returned value for the game, it is necessary to receive a recording medium (that is, increase in labor). Prevent overuse of value. Further, since there is an opportunity to settle the value of the returned recording medium with the settlement apparatus 580, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in S118 of FIG. 58, an example has been described in which half of the accepted amount is stored in the remaining frequency in the partially usable process. However, the amount is not limited to half of the accepted amount, and any portion of the accepted amount may be stored in the remaining frequency. That is, the usable processing means may be a part that performs a partly usable process that uses a part of the received value as a usable value on condition that the received value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the confirmation condition shown in S131 of FIG. 58 is “the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a certain value” has been described. However, the confirmation condition is not limited to this, and it may be “a game time is a certain time or more” or “a predetermined time has elapsed during the game”.

  Here, when the confirmation condition is “the time during which the game is played is a certain time or more”, for example, in the player DB of the hall computer 540, the time during which the game is played in association with the face data Is stored, and if the time during which the game is played is equal to or longer than a certain time (for example, 2 hours), the process of S132 is performed assuming that the confirmation condition is satisfied.

  When the confirmation condition is “a predetermined time has elapsed during the game”, for example, in the player DB of the hall computer 540, the time when the game is started is stored in association with the face data, Every time a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses from the stored time, the process of S132 is performed assuming that the confirmation condition is satisfied.

  According to this, by letting the player grasp the accumulated value, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value to the game.

  The use operation (the operation of the ball lending button 751) is accepted on the condition that the playing time is a certain time or more, or a predetermined time has elapsed during the game, and the use operation is Based on the fact that a different specific operation (operation of the confirmation button) is further accepted (YES in S133), the use process (ball lending process in S135) is performed. According to this, if the time during which the game is played exceeds a certain time, or if a predetermined time has elapsed during the game, the number of operations for performing the use processing increases, so that excessive use of the value for the game can be prevented. .

  In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which a specific operation (operation of the confirmation button) is received in S133 to perform the ball lending process on condition that the confirmation condition shown in S131 of FIG. 58 is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific operation may always be accepted to perform the ball lending process regardless of whether or not the confirmation condition is satisfied. According to this, since it takes one more time to perform the ball lending process, it is possible to prevent excessive use of the value for the game. It is also effective to make the user aware of overuse by displaying the accumulated amount on the display 7123 at that time.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the specific operation is the operation of the confirmation button indicated by D2 or D2 ′ in FIG. 58 has been described. However, the confirmation button is not limited to that displayed on the touch panel display 7123, and may be an independent button provided at a predetermined location of the card unit 750. The specific operation may be a re-operation of the return button 752. That is, the specific operation may be a specific operation different from the use operation.

  As described above, the object of the present invention is to prevent overuse of value in games, but the prevention of overuse can also be achieved by the following method.

  When the cumulative amount reaches a certain amount, the error goes down. According to this, since a player can be calmed down by taking a certain period of time until error handling, overuse can be prevented.

  After accepting bills of high denomination (5000 yen, 10,000 yen), display the desired amount of use below the set amount (for example, 5000 yen) and make it available up to the selected amount. The lending button 751 is invalidated. According to this, overuse can be prevented by having the player decide the desired amount of money at the time of payment.

  For each player, the number of deposits of each denomination is managed, and when a player who has received a denomination of a denomination inserts a banknote of that denomination, the banknote is returned. According to this, overuse can be prevented by limiting the number of times of deposit.

  Each time a bill is inserted, a confirmation operation (for example, an operation of a deposit button displayed on the display 7123) is accepted. According to this, excessive use can be prevented by adding one effort to the deposit. It is also effective to make the user aware of overuse by displaying the accumulated amount on the display 7123 at that time.

  The game time from insertion of the membership card or visitor card to return is displayed on the display 7123. According to this, the display of the game time and making the player aware of the game can prevent the sinking.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the second to fourth embodiments, a case has been described in which the invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine 701 that is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball. In the fifth embodiment, the invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game ball and gives a score in response to detection of a winning ball.

  Specifically, the gaming machine of the above embodiment is a gaming machine in which a game ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the game ball or rental ball that the player has paid out is launched into the game area. However, the game score for use in the game is given using the frequency that is the game value of the size specified by the record information of the game recording medium such as the membership card or the visitor card, and is given. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using a gaming score given by winning a game score or winning a game. .

  In other words, after the game medium (game ball) passes through the start area, based on the establishment of the start condition that allows the start of the variable display, a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner and a display result is derived. A game machine that includes a variable display device for displaying, and when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device, the game machine shifts to a specific game state that is advantageous to a player. A game ball encapsulated in the gaming machine is used to play the game area, and the game score is subtracted in response to the game ball being driven, and the game ball wins the winning area provided in the game area. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that adds game scores accordingly. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing an outline of authentication of an enclosed game machine in the fifth embodiment. Referring to FIG. 59, in such an enclosed game machine, a mechanism for authenticating whether the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the card unit 750 have been illegally modified is defined.

  In this mechanism, the authentication / communication control circuit 7311 of the main board 731 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 is connected to the authentication / communication control circuit 7371 of the payout control board 737, the interface board 766, and the control unit 7510 of the card unit 750. The authentication / communication control circuit 7501 and the hall server 590 are communicably connected to the key management server 600. Further, devices on the way between the main board 731 and the key management server 600 are also communicably connected to the key management server 600.

  These devices can authenticate whether these devices have been tampered with by exchanging authentication information with the key management server 600. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the security of the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the card unit 750.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 701 can give a predetermined game point when a winning occurs and can play a game using the game point. Based on the reception of the operation of the ball lending button 751 by the card unit 750, information that can specify the game points to be added using at least a part of the accepted money is transmitted to the pachinko gaming machine 701. The The card unit 750 receives information from the pachinko gaming machine 701 that can identify the game points stored in the pachinko gaming machine 701 based on the reception of the counting operation at each counter 705. For this reason, it is possible to deal with a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 701 in which a predetermined game point is given by the occurrence of a winning and a game using the game point is possible.

  Next, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 60, the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the card unit (hereinafter also referred to as “CU”) 750 transmits a status information request command including a game ball addition request = OFF to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “P”) 701. In response to this, the P stand 701 returns a response of the state information response including the number of game balls = 50 to the CU 750.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, the CU 750 lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 751 is pressed, the CU 750 confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of added balls = 125. As described above, the remaining amount consumption is determined by the CU 750 alone when the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, the CU 750 is in the addition display. During this addition display, it is displayed on the display that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the remaining amount and are being added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 750 issues a game ball addition request to the P stand 701. Therefore, the CU 750 transmits a status information request command including a game ball addition request = ON and the number of added balls = 125 to the P stand 701. In response to this, the P stand 701 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of added balls) = 175. And since the P stand 701 notifies the CU 750 of the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK, the response of the state information response including the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK is sent to the CU 750. Send back.

  Thereafter, the CU 750 transmits a status information request command including a game ball addition request = OFF to the P stand 701. The P stand 701 returns a response of the state information response including the number of game balls = 175 to the CU 750.

  Next, the normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 61 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, the card return ready state bits transmitted from the CU 750 to the P stand 701 are all OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  Also, in FIG. 61, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. Yes.

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 750 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 701. In response to this, the P stand 701 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 750.

  For the serial number n transmitted from the CU 750, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P stand 701. The same counting sequence number m is returned from the P base 701 to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 750. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button. In FIG. 61, immediately after an operation of pressing the count button once, a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 1, a card return ready state = OFF, a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF is issued from the CU 750. Is transmitted to the base 701.

When the operation of the count button is detected, the P platform 701 transmits a status information response of serial number n + 1, in which the count request value is specifically set to 100, to the CU 750 as a response to the status information request command. However, at this stage, the P base 701 does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a message indicating a counting request, the counting sequence number is counted up to “m + 1”. At this time, the P unit 701 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and backs up the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data.

  The CU 750 that has received the status information response of the serial number n + 1 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of the balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323 transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350. In response to the instruction, the display control unit 350 controls the display on the P-base 701 side. As a result, the display 54 displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number of balls is decreased, while the number of balls is increased.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the number of balls to the number of balls, and various display effects.

  Further, the CU 750 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 750 transmits a status information request of sequence number n + 2, count sequence number m + 1, and count response = ON to the P platform 701 to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  Upon receiving this status information request, the P platform 701 finally subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29 from 800 to 700. At this stage, the P table 701 is turned off in the count request state, but since the count button continues to be pressed, the P table 701 transmits a second count request to the CU 750. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU 750. However, even at this stage, the P stand 701 does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 700. Since this status information response is a message transmitted as a new count request, the count sequence number is incremented to “m + 2”, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number is updated. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  The CU 750 that has received the status information response of the serial number n + 2 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 200. Further, the CU 750 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 750 transmits a status information request of serial number n + 3, counting serial number m + 2, and counting response = ON to the P platform 701 to notify that the requested counting is completed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P stand 701 subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counted balls = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29 from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P base 701 notifies the CU 750 of a count completion serial number n + 3 status response. That is, with the current number of game balls = 600, a status information response of counting request = OFF and counting ball number = 0 is transmitted to the CU 750. In addition, since all the counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting sequence number included in this status information response remains m + 2 and is not updated.

  The CU 750 that has received this status information response determines that the counting is complete. Although not shown, the CU 750 transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return ready state = OFF, and counting response = OFF to the P base 701.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. In the stage where the information status response for notifying the number of balls is transmitted and the receipt confirmation is received from the CU, the P machines subtract the game balls.

  Next, in a game hall where a plurality of gaming machines are installed, a hall control 900 is provided separately from the hall server 801 in order to manage the appearance of each gaming machine. FIG. 62 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the hall server 801 and hall control 900 connected to the P platform 701 and the CU 750.

  The data output format of the P stand 701 differs depending on the gaming machine manufacturer. Therefore, the CU 750 calculates (converts) the output data of various formats into a predetermined format and outputs the data to the hall control 900 via the terminal device 901. Setting data for the calculation (conversion) is input to the CU control unit 323 and stored therein.

  Further, the data reception format of the hall control 900 differs depending on the hall control manufacturer. Therefore, the hall control 900 shown in FIG. 62 is connected to the CU 750 via the stand terminal device 901. The terminal device 901 converts the format of the output data from the CU 750 into a format that matches various Hallcons 900 and transmits the format to the Hallcons 900. Note that the number control of the P stand 701 by the hall control 900 is set in the hall control 900 in association with the stand terminal device 901. Specifically, the hall control 900 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and an EEPROM, and the CPU uses the unit number of the P unit 701 and the unit terminal device as unit number management data in accordance with the operation of the capacity or the like. The number 901 is associated with and stored in the EEPROM. Serial communication is performed between the P base 701 and the CU 750, and parallel communication output from a plurality of output pins of the CU 750 is performed between the CU 750 and the base terminal apparatus 901. Serial communication is performed between the two.

  However, it is not necessary to interpose the base terminal device 901 by providing the CU 750 or the hall control 900 with a function of converting to a format that matches various hall control 900s.

  Next, a configuration in which the hall control 900 is directly connected to the hall server 801 will be described. FIG. 63 is a block diagram for explaining another configuration of the hall server 801 and hall controller 900 connected to the P platform 701 and the CU 750.

  The hall control 900 is directly connected to the hall server 801 so that the CU 750 can transmit information managed by the hall controller to the hall control 900 via the hall server 801. A plurality of CUs 750 are connected to the hall server 801, and the hall server 801 collects output signals from the plurality of CUs 750 and transmits them to the hall control 900. In this case, the hall server 801 is responsible for the function of the terminal device 901 that converts to a format that matches the various hallcons 900 and transmits the format to the hallcon 900. Note that the CU 750 may be responsible for all the functions of the terminal device 901 that converts the data into a predetermined format and transmits it to the hall control 900, and also shares the roles such as which information is to be converted between the hall server 801 and the CU 750. You may control to. Furthermore, when the hall server 801 collects output signals from a plurality of CUs 750 and transmits them to the hall control 900, the contents of the information to be sent may be sent as information. For example, when the hall server 801 periodically transmits signals received from a plurality of CUs 750 to the hall control 900 (for example, every 10 seconds), the information of all the CUs 750 received during the 10 seconds is collectively hall. Send to Con 900.

  The hall server 801 must be connected to the CU 750 for the purpose of managing the possession balls and storage balls. As shown in FIG. 63, the hall server 801 collectively transmits the information from the plurality of CU 750s to the hall control 900. In this case, existing wirings from the plurality of CUs 750 to the hall server 801 can be used effectively, and it is sufficient to newly install only the wiring connecting the hall server 801 and the hall control 900, and the number of wirings can be reduced. . In addition, when game information from each gaming machine is collectively output to the hall control 900 by, for example, the island terminal device, it is necessary to collect the gaming information for each island where the gaming machine is installed. However, in the case of FIG. 63, it is not necessary to collect each gaming machine installation island, and there is no restriction on the installation layout of gaming machines. Furthermore, there are no restrictions on the layout of the gaming machine island.

  In FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, the unit number may be managed by the hall control 900 in association with the holder ID which is the ID stored in the mounting frame (holder) for mounting and installing the CU 750. Even if the CU 750 is replaced with a new one, the mounting frame (holder) is not replaced, and the previous mounting frame (holder) is continuously used. When managing the unit number with the hall control 900 in association with the holder ID, when the P unit 701 of a new unit number is exchanged, the CU 750 has the unit number of the P unit 701 and the mounting frame (holder). Is transmitted to the hall control 900 (in the case of FIG. 63, it is transmitted to the hall control 900 via the hall server 801). Receiving this, the CPU of the hall control 900 sets and stores the unit number of the P unit 701 and the holder ID in the EEPROM in association with each other. Note that a staff member may manually enter the machine number and holder ID of the P machine 701 into the hall control 900. The hall server 801 has a CPU, ROM, RAM, and an input / output interface, and receives information transmitted from the CU 750 through the input / output interface. In the case of FIG. 63, the reception information is output from the input / output interface and transmitted to the hall control 900 under the control of the CPU.

  Another management method may be as follows. As described with reference to FIG. 62, ID data such as the main chip ID and payout control chip ID of the P base 701 is transmitted to the key management server 800 via the CU 750 and the hall server 801. Also, when the board is replaced and replaced with a new main control board, ID data such as the main chip ID of the P stand 701 is transmitted to the key management server 800 via the CU 750 and the hall server 801. Therefore, the hall server 801 can acquire the main chip ID and transmit it to the hall controller 900 during transmission to the key management server 800.

  Therefore, in the system shown in FIG. 63, the hall server 801 transmits the transmitted main chip ID to the hall control 900, and the hall console 900 manages the gaming machine number based on the main chip ID data. When the table is replaced (board exchange), for example, the CU 750 receives the ID data such as the main chip ID after the table exchange (board exchange) and the ID data such as the main chip ID before the table exchange (board exchange). The data is transmitted to the hall control 900, and the CPU of the hall control 900 updates the ID data stored in the EEPROM in association with the gaming machine number to the ID data after the base exchange (board exchange). Similarly, in the system of FIG. 62, the CU 750 also transmits ID data such as the main chip ID of the P stand 701 to the hall control 900, so that the hall control 900 performs ID number management using the ID data. It may be. Specifically, in FIGS. 62 and 63, the CPU of the hall control 900 receives the main chip ID and the security board ID data sent from the P base 701, and correlates with the ID data to the P base 701. Are stored in the EEPROM of the hall control 900 to manage the number.

  Further, in the system shown in FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, the hall control 900 stores the management data of the gaming machine number that stores the model of the gaming machine in association with the gaming machine number, and based on the management data Control may be performed so that card units corresponding to gaming machines of the same model are indexed, and setting data for calculating (converting) into a predetermined format is downloaded to the batch CU 750 and set collectively.

  In the system shown in FIG. 63, since the terminal device 901 is not interposed between the CU 750 and the hall control 900, the format of the output data from the CU 750 is converted into a format that matches the hall control 900. Send to Hallcon 900. Note that if the standards by Hallcon manufacturers are unified, format conversion in the Hall server 801 becomes unnecessary.

  The number control of the P base 701 by the hall control 900 is set in the hall control 900 in association with the holder ID stored in the holder of the CU 750, or the main chip ID and security board sent from the P base 701 are set. The machine number may be managed by ID or the like. Based on the unit number management data, the batch setting data may be downloaded to the CU 750 group corresponding to the P unit 701 of the same model via the hall server 801 and set collectively.

  As described above, when the game board of the P stand 701 is exchanged (board exchange), the main chip ID of the main control board provided in the new game board 26 is transmitted to the CU 750, the hall server 801, and the key management server 800. The Therefore, by managing the unit number of the new machine based on the main chip ID, the hall control 900 checks whether or not the setting of the machine number of the new machine has been changed based on the main chip ID, and forgetting to set it. In this case, it is possible to prevent forgetting to set by notifying.

  Next, processing for transmitting data from the CU 750 to the hall control 900 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart for explaining the process of transmitting the number of added balls by the CU control unit 323. Note that the processing according to the flowchart can be applied to any of the systems shown in FIGS.

  Of the data transmitted from the CU 750 to the hall control 900, the number of balls to be added by the CU control unit 323 will be described. First, the CU control unit 323 receives information on the number of added balls from the P stand 701 (step S351).

  The CU control unit 323 converts the received number of added balls into a predetermined format (for example, converts 10 added balls into a one-pulse signal), and transmits it (step S352).

  The information received in S351 may be the number of fired balls in addition to or instead of the number of added balls. Furthermore, as another example of the information received in S351, the following may be used.

a Number of symbol determinations when the variable display device is variable stopped.
b Number of winning balls in various winning gates.

  Further, the method of converting the received number of added balls into a predetermined format and outputting the same is not limited to the conversion of the above-described ten pieces into a one-pulse signal. For example, an output method may be employed in which which type of signal is assigned to which output pin, the output length of the signal, and further, a plurality of types of signals are combined into one output pin and converted into an output.

  Further, in the case of the symbol determination number of a described above, control is performed so that one pulse is output when the symbol is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). If (for example, 10 balls) wins, it may be controlled to output one pulse.

  As described above, various types of information can be considered as information to be converted into a predetermined format in S352. Until such information reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the CU 750 cumulatively adds information periodically sent from the P stand 701, and when the added value reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), 1 A pulse is output and the accumulated addition value is cleared until then, and accumulation addition of the next information is started. In this “clearing the cumulative addition value”, a predetermined number (for example, 10) may be subtracted from the cumulative addition value. Since this “one pulse” signal is a serial signal, it is output as data in which a specific bit indicating that the transmission information (for example, the number of added balls) is a predetermined number (for example, 10) is “1”. .

  Next, game information processing by the CU control unit 323 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart for explaining game information processing by the CU control unit 323. Note that the processing according to the flowchart can be applied to any of the systems shown in FIGS.

  First, the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not there is an input with respect to an output method of game information output from the CU 750, that is, setting data for calculating (converting) the game information into a predetermined format (step S361). ). When the CU control unit 323 determines that there is an input regarding the output method from setting means such as a remote controller (step S361: YES), based on the input output method, the bit position and output period for the game information output from the CU 750 The output method such as output presence / absence and information conversion is set (step S362). On the other hand, when the CU control unit 323 determines that there is no input for the output method (step S361: NO), the process of step S362 is skipped and the previously set output method is used.

  The output method set in step S362 is for converting gaming machine information in a data output format that differs depending on the gaming machine manufacturer into a data reception format that differs depending on the hall controller manufacturer, and outputting the data to the hall controller 900. .

  It should be noted that instead of the output method input using the remote controller described above, the output method data may be downloaded from the hall control 900 and stored in the CU control unit 323. Furthermore, output method data may be downloaded from the server of the manufacturer of the P platform 701 connected to the CU 750 and stored in the CU control unit 323. As a download path in this case, it is conceivable to download output method data from the manufacturer's server to the CU control unit 323 via the key management server 800 and the hall server 801. When downloading the data of the output method from the server of the manufacturer of the P stand 701, the game information that the person who designed and manufactured the P stand 701 intends to output to the hall control 900 can be set in the CU 750 as intended. There is an advantage that it is not necessary to set on the game hall side.

  The CU control unit 323 determines whether or not game information (for example, the game table states 2 and 3 shown in FIG. 5) has been received from the P table 701 (step S363). When the CU control unit 323 determines that no game information is received from the P stand 701 (step S363: NO), the process ends. On the other hand, when the CU control unit 323 determines that the game information has been received from the P stand 701 (step S363: YES), the CU control unit 323 converts the received game information into the set output method (step S364). Here, since the CU control unit 323 converts the gaming information into a format that matches the hall control 900 by the set output method, the gaming machine information of the data output format that differs depending on the gaming machine manufacturer is changed to the data that differs depending on the hall control manufacturer. It can be converted into a reception format and output to the hall control 900.

  After converting the game information, the CU control unit 323 outputs the converted game information for transmission to the hall control 900 (step S365). The CU control unit 323 determines whether information to be displayed on the display 312 is included in the game information received from the P table 701 (step S366).

  When the CU control unit 323 determines that information to be displayed on the display is included (step S366: YES), the CU control unit 323 performs control to display game information on the display (step S367). On the other hand, if the CU control unit 323 determines that the information to be displayed on the display is not included (step S366: NO), the process ends.

  Note that the card unit 750 is connected to the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the hall computer 540 so as to be communicable, and converts the information generated by the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the hall computer 540 and transmits the external output. A terminal (not shown) may be provided. For this reason, even if the information generated by the pachinko gaming machine 701 is not information for the conventional hall computer 540, the information generated by the pachinko gaming machine 701 is converted and transmitted to the conventional hall computer 540. Hall computer 540 can be used.

  Further, the card unit 750 replaces the information generated by the pachinko gaming machine 701 with the external output terminal for converting and transmitting the information to the hall computer 540, and converts it into the pachinko gaming machine 540. An external output terminal that relays the information generated in 701 may be provided.

  In such a sealed game machine, when the holding ball / storing ball information screen as described in FIG. 47 is displayed on the display of the card unit 750, even if an operation for replay is performed, No processing for replay is performed, and even if an operation for adding the number of balls to the number of balls is performed, processing for adding the number of balls to the number of balls is not performed. On the other hand, the ball lending process according to the operation for ball lending is not prevented from being executed.

  In addition, when the ball and pool information screen is displayed, you may not be able to perform operations for replaying, or you may not be able to perform operations to add the number of balls to the number of balls. May be.

[Modification]
Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.

  (1) For example, in the above embodiment, a medal is applied as an example of a game medium, but a spherical pachinko ball (game ball) may be applied.

  (2) In the above embodiment, the pachinko parlor where the slot machine 1 or the pachinko machine is installed is illustrated as the game arcade where the medal lending machine 100 is installed, but the game arcade to which the present invention is applied. May be a game center or the like.

  (3) In the embodiment, the counted regular medals are discharged and collected from the discharge port 192 to the game island. However, the regular medals are stored in the housing 101 in the same manner as the illegal medals. However, it may be recovered as appropriate.

  (4) In the above embodiment, when medals are counted by the counting device 190, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the number of medals held in the card table (see FIG. 20A) (FIG. 36). When the illegal medal detection notification condition is satisfied, the control unit 181 subtracts the value of the cumulative illegal medal number from the medal number of the card table (see FIG. 20A). However, other modes may be used. For example, when the counting device 190 counts medals, the control unit 181 suspends adding 1 to the number of medals and records it in the hold count value, and the illegal medal detection notification condition is not satisfied. The holding count value may be added to the number of medals.

  (5) In the embodiment, the authenticity of the medal counted by the counting device 190 is determined. However, when the payout device 182 pays out the medal, the authenticity of the medal is determined. The illegal medals may be stored in a storage unit in the payout device 182 to prevent the illegal medals from being paid out. Then, when the storage unit in the payout device 182 becomes full, and when a predetermined amount of medals are stored at the time of closing (end of business), the illegal medals in the storage unit in the payout device 182 are collected. You may make it perform the alerting | reporting to carry out.

  That is, the gaming device of the present invention includes a gaming device that includes one or both of a counting device that counts game media such as medals and a payout device (rental device) that pays out (lends) game media.

  (6) Also, in the above embodiment, at the end of the game hall business, the medal management computer 550 requests each medal lending machine 100 to execute a tightening related process (business closing process). When the request is received, when the number of medals in the medal storage box 194 (reservoir) reaches a predetermined number (second storage amount), this is notified. (2 storage amount) is notified at the time when the game room is closed as well as during the business hours, and the corresponding slot machine 1 is in a standby state (game is performed). Notification may be made when the state is not in the state.

  (7) In the embodiment, the number of medals in the medal storage box 194 reaches the second storage amount based on the reception of the tightening related process request for performing the request for executing the tightening related process (business closing process). However, the notification may be made based on the reception of a request other than the tightening related processing request.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of medals in the medal storage box 194 has reached the second threshold (second storage amount) in the tightening-related processing, and notification is made when the second threshold is reached. However, the timing for determining whether or not the second threshold value has been reached can be changed in various ways, and it is always determined whether or not the second threshold value has been reached. In such a case, the fact is stored (for example, a predetermined flag is set), and whether or not it is determined that it has been reached when the game hall is closed (whether or not the predetermined flag is set). ) And may be notified if stored.

  (8) In the embodiment, when the number of medals in the medal storage box 194 (storage unit) reaches a first threshold value (first storage amount) that is a predetermined number that needs to be collected, this is indicated. Although notification is made, if notification is not made when it is reached, for example, notification may be made after the end of business, for example, notification that the first threshold value has been reached in the tightening-related processing. You may make it do.

  (9) In the embodiment, when setting is performed on the illegal medal relation setting screen, “100 sheets” is set as the “full tank notification condition” as the first threshold (first storage amount), “50 sheets” is set in the “closing store notification condition” as the second threshold (second storage amount), and the first threshold and the second threshold are set as different numbers. The second threshold value may be set to be the same number.

  (10) In the above embodiment, the medal lending machine 100 indicates that the medal storage amount of the medal storage box 194 has reached the first threshold (first storage amount) or the second threshold (second storage amount). Although the state notification lamp 111 for notification by light is provided, a speaker capable of outputting sound or a display device for notification by a predetermined image may be provided. Furthermore, if the medal lending machine 100 has a function capable of outputting to the external device (medal management computer 550, etc.) that the medal storage amount of the medal storage box 194 has reached the first threshold value or the second threshold value, The notification means may not necessarily be provided, but may be provided in an electrically connected external device or the like.

  (11) In the above embodiment, each medal lending machine 100 exemplifies a mode in which regular medals are registered individually, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these regular medals are registered. The medal image may be distributed from the medal management computer 550 to each medal lending machine 100 so that it can be registered at once, or a storage medium such as a flash memory in which the image of the regular medal is stored can be rented individually. It may be installed in the machine 100 for registration.

  (12) In the embodiment described above, the remaining amount of medals (the number of balls) is left in the medal lending machine 100 (card unit 750), and only the remaining prepaid amount is associated with the deposit amount corresponding card and discharged to the outside. It was made to be. As a result, when there are counted medals (game balls), it is possible to prevent a medal lending using a prepaid balance not used for medal lending out of accepted money from being erroneously performed. it can.

  Generally, the unit price of a game medium when a prepaid balance is used to lend a game medium such as a medal is higher than the unit price of a game medium when a medal is exchanged for a prize. For this reason, a player who uses a medal with a low unit price can play more games with less value than a player who uses a loaned medal with a high unit price. It is advantageous. Therefore, it is effective for a player to prevent the medal lending using the prepaid balance from being erroneously performed even though there are medals.

  (13) When a card return operation is performed, the card unit 750 may transmit a signal indicating that to the pachinko gaming machine 701. The pachinko gaming machine 701 may receive the signal and notify that the card has been ejected. In this way, even when the return button is accidentally touched, the fact that the card has been ejected is notified, so there is no need to forget to acquire the card and the card can be prevented from being stolen. . A signal indicating that the card return operation has been performed may be transmitted to the calling lamp 200 instead of the pachinko gaming machine 701 to notify the calling lamp 200 that the card has been ejected.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the membership card is a complete ID management system, and the visitor card is a system that records information on the card in addition to the complete ID system. The complete ID management method is a method in which only identification information such as a card ID is recorded on a card, and management of the remaining amount, holding balls, and storage balls is performed by a management computer in association with the identification information.

  However, it is not limited to this, the membership card and the visitor card are both complete ID management, both are stored in the card, both are used together, one is the complete ID management, the other is stored in the card, and either is used together It is possible to adopt various methods as a management method of the remaining amount, the holding ball, and the stored ball, such as the complete ID management on the other side, the combination on one side, and the other side being stored in the card.

  (15) The player's face may be imaged and stored when the deposit amount corresponding card is discharged in step Sh15 of the remaining amount withdrawal process of FIG. The remaining amount discharge flag is turned on in step Sk1 of the issue / payment process in FIG. 32, step Sm13 in the return process in FIG. 33, step Sp3 in the replay process in FIG. 35, step Sj11 in the post-card insertion process in FIG. In addition to determining whether or not the player is in a state, it is determined whether or not the player's face when the remaining amount is discharged matches the current player's face. If they match, the processing may proceed to the subsequent processing. As a result, in the case where the player does not have a matching face and does not have a deposit balance card, it is not necessary to proceed to the subsequent processing, so that unnecessary processing can be prevented from being executed.

  In particular, in the case of the post-card insertion process in FIG. 43, when the player leaves the deposit-amount-compatible card in a state where it is left out of the card insertion slot, Even if the card is inserted by operating the “” button, the faces do not match, and therefore the processing for associating the number of medals in the medal lending machine 100 with the card is not performed, so the medal is stolen. I can't.

  (16) In the embodiment described above, in the remaining amount extraction process of FIG. 42, after the deposit remaining amount corresponding card is discharged in step Sh15, the possessed medal corresponding card is issued in step Sh18. At this time, in the member card table or the visitor card table shown in FIG. 22, the card ID of the deposit remaining amount correspondence card and the card ID of the possession medal correspondence card may be associated with each other. Or you may make it memorize | store the flag which shows whether a corresponding deposit remaining amount corresponding | compatible card or a medal corresponding card | curd exists.

  That is, you may make it manage a payment remaining amount corresponding | compatible card and a corresponding medal corresponding card | curd correspondingly. This management may be performed by a management apparatus such as the card management computer 500, or may be performed by a gaming apparatus such as the medal lending machine 100.

  Then, when the payment remaining amount corresponding card is accepted by the settlement apparatus 580, the card management computer 500 is inquired as to whether or not the flag is stored corresponding to the card ID when the prepaid balance is inquired. Only when there is a response indicating that there is a card with medals, the presence of a card with medals may be notified.

  This makes it possible to alert the player to exchange medals with the number of medals specified on the card with medals for prizes only when necessary when the balance specified with the card corresponding to the deposit is settled. . As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to exchange prizes without performing unnecessary notification.

  In addition, when a game device such as another medal lending machine 100 or a card unit 750 receives a card with a remaining deposit or a card with a corresponding medal, is there a corresponding card with a corresponding medal or a card with a remaining deposit? Whether or not the card management computer 500 is inquired and there is a response indicating that it exists may be notified to the player.

  As a result, even when the player moves to another gaming machine, the presence of a corresponding medal-supported card or a deposit balance card can be notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming medium from being lent by using the prepaid balance specified by the deposit remaining amount corresponding card even though there is a possessed medal specified by the possessed medal compatible card. In addition, when there is no longer a medal specified by the card corresponding to a medal, it is possible to notify the player that there is a prepaid balance specified by the card corresponding to the remaining payment amount, so that unnecessary payment can be prevented. it can.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, the setting of functions for the membership card or the visitor card and the processing being executed are taken over only at the game hall. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be handed over to other amusement halls.

  (18) As a specific function described in step Sj20 of FIG. 43 described above, the gaming apparatus such as the medal lending machine 100 is configured such that the number of jackpots and the number of jackpot fluctuations on the display 123 and the call lamp 200 of the medal lending machine 100 are as follows. A display screen custom function for customizing a display method (for example, display content, layout, etc.) of the game information may be provided. Although the index to be emphasized differs depending on the player, by providing the function, it is possible to display the game information according to the player's desire and improve the player's willingness to play. Further, the setting of the display method or the like in this function may be taken over by the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 in FIG.

  Moreover, you may make it provide another function as a specific function. For example, as a specific function, a display design custom function for customizing a display design such as an avatar and a background displayed on the display 123 or the call lamp 200 may be provided. Thereby, since it can be set as the display design suitable for the player's taste, a player's willingness to play can be improved. The setting of the design content with this function may also be taken over by the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 in FIG.

  Also, as a specific function, a game with a low ball rental machine with a low unit price per ball (for example, 1 yen per ball) (for example, a slot machine with 1 medal of 5 yen, a pachinko game machine with 1 yen per ball). Or a normal ball rental machine with a normal unit price per ball (for example, a slot machine with one medal of 20 yen, a pachinko machine with 4 yen per ball). In addition, when a card with the setting of the function is inserted into a medal lending machine or a card unit of a gaming machine different from the setting, a function of notifying that the setting is different may be provided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a player from making a mistake in selecting a gaming machine having a unit price for which a game is desired. Selection setting by this function may also be transferred to the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 of FIG.

  In addition, as a specific function, whether to give priority to the game with the holding ball or to give priority to the game with the storage ball is selected and set so that the set holding ball or the storage ball is used with priority. May be. Thereby, it is possible to play a game using the possession balls or storage balls to be prioritized. Selection setting by this function may also be transferred to the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 of FIG.

  Further, as a specific function, the amount used for the game after the game is started may be a predetermined amount (the amount set by the player may be a predetermined amount, for example, 30000 yen, etc. It may be provided with a squeeze-in limiting function for notifying that or limiting the game when it becomes above (or over). As a result, it is possible to limit the player's infiltration into the game. The setting of the predetermined amount with this function may also be transferred to the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 in FIG.

  In addition, as the specific process described in step Sj20 of FIG. 43 described above, in this confinement restriction function, a process of accumulating the amount used for the game after the game is started may be executed. The process for accumulating the amount of money used with this function may be taken over by the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 in FIG.

  In addition, as a specific function, if it is prohibited to share a game medium such as a ball or a medal with another player in a game, if it is determined that the player is different by face authentication, that fact May be provided with a sharing prohibition function for informing the store clerk or restricting the game. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the disadvantageous situation to the game store side as the prohibition of sharing can be ensured. Further, the game store side can increase the setting of the lottery probability of the slot machine game, which can be in an advantageous state for the player.

  In addition, in each vehicle counting function as a specific function, when a process of counting game media such as medals or pachinko balls is being executed, if the membership card is not accepted, the membership card is inserted. The membership card inserted later may be transferred to the game media counting process. As a result, it is possible to easily perform processing for storing balls and storing medals with the membership card.

  In addition, in the drink ordering function as a specific function, there are not enough balls in the middle of the process of paying the price of the drink from the number of balls on the card that the clerk providing the drink has received earlier In addition, if a card with a recorded ball is inserted later, the adjustment process is taken over so that the amount of the card that has been inserted later is compensated for the missing value. You may make it settle from.

  (19) In the process of step Sj20 in FIG. 43, a process for confirming whether or not the function setting and the function executing process are to be succeeded to the card inserted later may be executed.

  (20) The medal management computer 550 or the card management computer 500 manages the setting of functions for the recording medium and the processing being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be managed by another management apparatus such as the hall computer 540.

  (21) In the embodiment described above, the small-lot lending valid flag is stored only in the card table as shown in FIG. 20 of the gaming apparatus such as the medal lending machine 100, and the card management computer 500 or the like. The data is not stored in the membership card table or the visitor card table as shown in FIG. In other words, the small lending function is not managed by the management device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small-lot lending function may be managed by the management device as well as other functions.

  (22) The function settings stored in the visitor card table of FIG. 22B (for example, the card lock valid flag, password, etc.) are not being used and are being stored. And when the game shop is closed. The function settings (for example, card lock valid flag) stored in the member card table of FIG. 22 (a) may or may not be cleared during the game shop closing process.

  In addition, it is preferable that a specific function setting (for example, a theft card flag of the theft card restriction function) is not cleared even at the time of a game shop closing process. Even if a theft card is used at a later date, the use of the card is restricted.

  (23) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 43, the number of medals of the previous card is added to the card inserted later. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prepaid balance of the previous card may be added to the card inserted later, or the number of medals and the prepaid balance may be added together.

  (24) At least two of the management devices such as the medal management computer 550, the hall computer 540, and the card management computer 500 may be used.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, the card management computer 500 sets the card lock valid flag and the personal identification number, which are the card lock function settings, and the theft card restriction function. The theft card flag is now managed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 26, the medal management computer 550 manages the history counting process, which is the process in which the game history counting function is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 20, the medal lending machine 100 stores a small amount lending flag which is a setting of the small amount lending function.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting of each function and the processing in which each function is executed may be managed by any management device, or for games such as the medal lending machine 100 or the card unit 750. It may be stored only in the apparatus.

  (26) The gaming apparatus has not only the medal lending machine 100 and the card unit 750 but also the function of counting each unit, and the number of possessed balls or information that can identify the number of possessed medals (for example, the number of possessed balls or possessed medals) The number itself, or the card ID that can identify the number of possessed balls or the number of possessed medals stored in association with the management device) is also recorded on the card.

  (27) The game history totaled by the game history totaling function may be configured to be transmitted from a gaming device such as the medal lending machine 100 or the card unit 750 to the player's portable terminal in a wired or wireless manner. .

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, as described in step Sj20 of FIG. 43, when the card inserted later is a membership card, the setting of the encryption number of the card lock function is not taken over. . In other words, when the later-inserted recording medium is a member-purpose recording medium, the function setting for the previously inserted recording medium is not transferred to the later-inserted recording medium.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of whether the later-inserted recording medium is for a member or non-member, the function setting for the previously inserted recording medium can be set in the later-inserted recording medium. You may make it not take over.

  In addition, instead of taking over the function settings for the previously inserted recording medium as they are, the settings whose contents and format have been changed may be taken over for the later inserted recording medium. For example, in step Sj20 of FIG. 43, the setting of the encryption number set in advance for the membership card inserted later is not inserted without taking over the setting of the security code of the visitor card inserted previously. It can also be considered that the membership card is taken over.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the embodiment has been described on the assumption that the recording medium processing device is the medal lending machine 100 and the card unit 750 that use a card as a recording medium. However, the recording medium used by the recording medium processing apparatus is not limited to the card, and may be another recording medium. For example, a coin-shaped recording medium, a memory card-shaped recording medium, or a portable terminal possessed by a player may be used as the recording medium.

  (30) In the above-described embodiment, the number of held balls and the number of stored balls are acquired from a management device such as the medal management computer 550 by a gaming device such as the medal lending machine 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be acquired from a recording medium such as a membership card and a visitor card by a gaming device.

  (31) The functions executed by the gaming devices such as the medal lending machine 100 and the card unit 750 and the management devices such as the medal management computer 550, the hall computer 540, and the card management computer 500 are the gaming devices. It may be executed by either the management device or the management device.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, as described in steps Sc31 and Sc32 of the counting process in FIG. 36, every time a medal is detected by the medal detection sensor 190h, the remaining time for counting is reset to 10 seconds. I tried to do it. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other methods may be used as long as counting is performed until it can be determined that there are no medals to be counted. For example, every time a medal is detected by the photo sensor 190e in FIG. 10, the remaining time to be counted may be reset to a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds).

  (33) In the embodiment described above, even if the rotating disk 190g is rotated in the counting process of FIG. 36, the medals in the lending process in step Sb21 and the replay process in step Sb24 in FIG. In the payout, the operation of the payout device 182 is not particularly disabled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while either one of the rotating disk 190g and the payout device 182 is operating, the other operation may be disabled. It is necessary to drive the motor for each operation, but the required electric energy can be suppressed by operating only one of them. When counting pachinko balls, there is no need to use a motor or the like, so that even if counting and payout are performed simultaneously, there will be no problem with the amount of power.

  (34) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming device such as the medal lending machine 100 can accept two recording media such as a membership card and a visitor card, and a portable terminal. . Then, when the number of game media such as holding balls and storage balls corresponding to one recording medium is displayed, control is performed so that the payout of the game media based on the other recording medium is also disabled.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. When game media such as holding balls and storage balls corresponding to both recording media are different, when the number of game media corresponding to one recording medium is displayed, the other The game media payout based on the recording media may not be disabled. As a result, even if replay on one recording medium is not possible, replay on the other recording medium can be performed. As a result, when a game medium is urgently needed due to the flow of the game, etc., it is possible to eliminate the need to rent a game medium based on its valuable value, so that the convenience of the player is improved. Can do.

  (34) The techniques of the first to fifth embodiments described above can be freely combined with each other as long as no contradiction arises.

  (35) In the embodiment described above, the counting device 190 is provided in the medal lending machine 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each counter may be provided as an external device for a gaming apparatus such as the medal lending machine 100.

  (36) In the above-described embodiment, game media (medals) are paid out from a gaming device such as the medal lending machine 100 based on the valuable value (prepaid balance or money), the number of held balls, or the number of stored balls. In addition, the game media (pachinko balls) are shown to be paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 701 according to the control signal from the gaming device, based on the valuable value (prepaid balance or money), the number of balls, or the number of balls. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and game media based on valuable value (prepaid balance or money) or the number of balls or the number of balls may be paid out from different devices (for example, different game devices).

  (37) It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 slot machine, 100 medal lending machine, 107, 107 'screw, 108a, 108b screw insertion hole, 109, 109' high brightness part, 140 receiving part, 141 introduction path cover, 141a front plate, 141b side plate, 141c inclined plate, 141d Inclined plate, 148, 148 ′ punching hole, 160 lid member, 160a lid plate, 160b lid member side plate, 162, 162 ′ female screw hole, 165 light emitting unit, 182 dispensing device, 190 counting device, 500 card management computer, 540 Hall computer, 550 medal management computer, 701 pachinko machine, 750 card unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming medium provided corresponding to a gaming machine capable of playing a game using a predetermined gaming medium, executing a lending process for lending the gaming medium based on the valuable value, and paid out from the gaming machine And a payout process for paying out game media based on at least one of the number of game media associated with the recording medium and the number of game media counted by the count processing. A management device capable of communicating with a gaming device,
Management means for managing the number of game media in association with the recording medium;
Transmitting means for transmitting to the gaming device information for displaying the number of gaming media associated with the recording medium on the gaming device;
The first information indicating that the illegal game medium has reached the predetermined storage amount in response to receiving from the gaming device, apparatus and relates for the game of the transmission source of the first information and the first information A notification means for performing the first notification ;
The notification means is different from the first notification in response to receiving from the gaming device second information indicating that an illegal gaming medium has reached a specific storage amount smaller than the predetermined storage amount. A management device that performs notification related to the second information and the gaming device that is the transmission source of the second information .